NCD980840409_19881201_Charles Macon Lagoon & Drum_FRBCERCLA FI_RI FS Project Operations Plan-OCR

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.I
~
MN:Dljl.XX.1<tl<Y
PROJECI' ~CIIS PIAN
TABIE OF CXNIEf.I'S
PROJECI' ORGI\NIZATIOO OJAR1'
SEO'IOO 1
mrroruCTioo
1. 1 Purpose of the Project Operations Plan
1.2 Site Description
1.3 Site History
SECTIOO 2
FIElD SAMPLING PU\N
2 .1 SAMPLING OVERVIEM
2. 2 Ml\GNEICMETER SURVEY
2.2.1
2.2.2
SUl:vey Procedure
Decontamination of Magnetaneter SUl:vey F.quipnent
2. 2. 3 QC for Magnet.aneter SUl:vey
2. 3 SOIL SAMPLING PROGRAM
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
SUrface Soil Sanpl:in;J Procedure
Decontamination for SUrface Soil Sanplin:J F.quipnent
QC for SUrface Soil Sanpl:in;J
SUbsurface Soil Sanpl:in;J Procedure
Decontamination for SUbsurface Soil Sanpl:in;J F.quipnent
2. 3. 6 QC for SUbsurface Soil Sanpl:in;J
2. 4 SEDIMENI' SAMPLING PROGRAM
2. 4 .1 stream Seclinent Sanpl:in;J Procedure
2.4.2
2.4.3
Porrl Seclinent Sanpl:in;J Procedure
Decontamination for Seclinent Sanplin:J F.quipnent
2. 4. 4 QC for Seclinent Sanpl:in;J
2. 5 SURFACE WATER SAMPLING PROGRAM
2.5.1 stream Sanpl:in;J Procedure
2. 5. 2 Porrl Sanpl:in;J Procedure
2.5.3
2.5.4
Decontamination for SUrface Water Sanpl:in;J F.quipnent
QC for SUrface Water Sanplin:J
i
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
2-1
2-1
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-9
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-17
2-18
2-18
2-19
-.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.6 GRa.JNrMATER SAMPLING moGRl\M
2. 6 .1 Groorrlwater Sanplin;J Procedure
2. 6. 2 Decontamination for Groorrlwater Sanplin;J F.quiprent
2.6.3 QC for Groorrlwater Sanplin;J
2. 7 WASTE SAMPLING moGRl\M
2.7.1 lagoon 10 Sanplin;J Procedure
2. 7. 2 Tanlc Sanplin;J Procedure
2. 8 SOIL GAS SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS moGRl\M
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
Soil Gas Sanplin;J Procedure
Decontamination for Soil Gas Sanplin;J F.quiprent
QC for Soil Gas Sanplin;J
SECI'ION 3
D.1\TA CDLIBCI'ION c;uALITY ASSURANCE PI.AN
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
~ OBJECTIVES FOR MFA5UREMENI' OF D.1\TA
3.1.1 Precision
3.1.2 Acalracy
3.1.3 :Representativeness
3.1.4 cauparability
3.1.5 Conpleteness
SAMPLING c;uALITY ASSURANCE
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
Bottle Preparation
Methods of Sanplin;J
!obnitorin;J Well Sanplin;J
SllMPlE aJS'IODY
C'ALIBRATION m:x::ErXJRES AND ~CT
D.1\TA REIXJCTION, VALIDM'ION, ANIJ REEORI'ING
FIEI.D c;uALITY cx:m'ROL OIEXX', AND ~
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
Trip Blanks
Field Blanks
F.quiprent Rinseate wash Blanks
Split Sanples
ii
PAGE
2-20
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-23
2-23
2-23
2-24
2-24
2-26
2-26
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-10
3-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
3. 7 ~ AS.SURANCE PERFQR-IANCE .AIJDI'IS AND SYSTEMS .AIJDI'IS
3. 7. l System Audits
3. 7. 2 Performance Audits
3.7.3 Formalized Audits
3. 8 PREVENTIVE MAINI'El'WICE P00CEIXJRES AND SC1IElJJliS
3.9 CDRRECI'IVE ACTION
3.10 ~ AS.SURANCE REIORIS
SECTION 4
HEAL'lH AND SAFEI'Y PIJ\N
4. l SITE l.OCATION AND HISIORY
4. 2 FIEID PERSONNEL
4.2.l
4.2.2
4.2.3
Site Safety Officer
Alternate Site Safety Officer
Field SUpervisor
4.2.4 Project Safety Officer
4. 2. 5 Miscellaneous Personnel
4. 3 PERSONNEL TRAINING
4.3.l Additional Tra~
4.4 SITE J.O'.'fSS
4.4.l
4.4.2
Point of Site EntryjExit
log Info.rt: Book
4.4.3 Fire Lanes
4.5 WJRK ZONES
4.5.l
4.5.2
4.5.3
Exclusion Zone
Contaminant Reduction Zone
SUWC,rt Zone
4. 6 SITE ::;PECIF'IC HAZARI:S
4. 6. l Air Monitorirq/Respiratory Hazards
4.6.l.l Monitori.rq For Volatile Organic catpoun::ls
4.6.l.2 Monitori.rq for Toluene am OXygen
iii
PAGE
3-10
3-11
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-13
3-15
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.6.2
4.6.1.3 Respiratory 'Ihreats fran semivolatiles
am. Inorganics
Denna]_ Hazards
H<OI'ECT'ION AND ACI'ION ll.VELS BY TASK
PERSOONEL ~ CLCYIHillG AND m,JIIMENI'
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
I.eve! B Protective F,quipnent arrl. Clothing
I.evel C Protective F,quipnent arrl. Clothing
I.eve! D Protective F,quipnent am. Clothing
DEXXlNI'J\MINATONffiOCEIXJRES
4.9.1
4.9.2
Prevention of Cbntamination
Decontamination Facilities
4.9.3 E)rergency Decontamination
SITE STANDI\RD OPERATING ffiOCEIXlRES (SOP's)
4.10.l Responsibility
4.10.2 Buddy System
4.10.3
4.10.4
4.10.5
Hoosekeepi.rg
Accidents
Safety Meeti.rgs
4.10.5.1 Initial Meeti.rgs
4.10.5.2 Daily Safety Meeti.rgs
SITE HFAIJIH AND SAFIY PUIN
4.11.1
4.11.2
M:xlification of Health arrl. Safety Plan
:Eosti.rg of Heal th am. Safety Plan
SITE SAFElY r.cx;
00-SITE VEllICTES
PERSCNAL GROCMING
ORAL 00 'S AND IXlN 'TS
m.x;s AND .AiaEOL
o:::MPLIANCE wrrn PUIN
EMERGENCY ffiOCEIXlRES
4.18.l
4.18.2
Emergency Signal
Medical Dnergencies
4.18.2.1 Hospital/lDcal Ehysician
4.18.2.2 First Aid
iv
PAGE
4-10
4-10
4-11
4-14
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-16
4-16
4-17
4-17
4-18
4-18
4-18
4-18
4-19
4-19
4-19
4-19
4-20
4-20
4-20
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-23
4-24
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B
I
I
4.18.3
4.18.4
4.18.5
4.18.6
4.18.7
Fire Drergency
Explosions
Drergency Telei:hone Numbers
Drergency Maps an:i Directions
4.18.6.1 Maps an:i Directions to Hospital
4.18.6.2 Map an:i Direction to Site fran Fire Deparbrent
Site Evacuation
4.18.7.1 UpW'in:i Withdrawal
4.18.7.2 Withdrawal fran Site
4.18.7.3 Evacuation of Neart,y Facilities
4 .19 MEDICAL M:lNITORING
4. 20 a:iNFINED SPACE ENTRY Pl10CErXJRES
SECTIOO 5
Pm-lI'ITINGRmJIREMENI'S
SECTIOO 6
Dot>.TAMAN11GEMENI'
V
PAGE
4-24
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-26
4-26
4-26
4-27
4-27
4-27
4-28
5-1
6-1
I
I LIST OF FIGJRES
Description Figure No. After Page No.
I 1 I.ocation Map 1-2
2 Magnetarete.r SUI:vey Grid 2-5
I 3 Magnetanete.r SUI:vey Grid 2-5
4 Magnetareter SUI:vey Grid 2-5
5 Magnetaiete.r SUI:vey Grid 2-5
I 6 Surface Soil Sarrq:>lirq I.ocations 2-7
7 Surface Soil Sarrq:>lirq I.ocations 2-7
I 8 Surface Soil Sarrq:>lirq I.ocations 2-7
9 Surface Soil Sarrq:>lirq I.ocations 2-7
I 10 Subsurface Soil Sarrq:>lirq I.ocations 2-9
11 Subsurface Soil Sarrq:>lirq I.ocations 2-9
I 12 Subsurface Soil Sarrq:>lirq I.ocations 2-9
13 Subsurface Soil Sarrq:>lirq I.ocations 2-9
14 Sedilrent Sarrq:>lirq I.ocations 2-13
I 15 Surface Water Sarrq:>lirq I.ocations 2-17
16 Grrun:iwate.r Sarrq:>lirq 2-20
I 17 Grrun:iwate.r Sarrq:>lirq 2-20
18 Grrun:iwate.r Sarrq:>lirq 2-20
I 19 Grrun:iwate.r Sarrq:>lirq 2-20
20 lagoon 10 Sarrq:>lirq I.ocations 2-23
I 21 Tank Sarrq:>lirq I.ocations 2-23
22 Tank Sarrq:>lirq I.ocations 2-23
I 23 Soil Gas Sarrq:>lirq Train 2-25
24 Main Point of Site EntryjExit 4-5
25 Initial Exclusion Zone 4-6
I 26 Initial Exclusion Zane 4-6
27 Initial Exclusion Zone 4-6
I 28 Initial Exclusion Zone 4-6
29 Decontamination Iayart:, Level B Protection 4-17
:1 30 Decontamination Iayart:, level C Protection 4-17
31 Directions an:i Map to Hospital 4-25
I
I
I vi
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ,.
I
I
Fiaure No.
32
33
UST OF FIGJRES
(CX.l'ltin.led)
Description After Page No.
Alternate Directions an:i Map to Hospital 4-25
Directions an:i Map to the Site fran the
Roc::km]ham Fire Department 4-26
vii
I
I Table No.
J:TS'I' OF -mmlS
Description After Page No.
I 1
2
Target Ccll!poorrl List. 2-1
Required Containers, Preservation,
I 3
am. Maxino.nn Holclirg Tine 2-2
Exclusion Zone Tasks am. Air ~torin;J
Parameters 4-8
I 4 SUnunru:y of Volatile Organic Ccll!poorrl
Olaracteristics 4-11
I 5
6
Measures for level B Decontamination 4-17
Measures for level C Decontamination 4-17
I 7
8
Minimum Measures for level B Decontamination 4-18
Minimum Measures for level C Decontamination 4-18
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
viii
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,g
n
MACON/DOCKERY
FIELD OPERATIONS
PROJECT TEAM ORGANIZATION
EPA Remedial RI/FS
Project Project
Manager Manager
System
. ----... -.... -------Quality Assuranc
Auditor
Project Site Project
Safety Manager Quality Assurance
Officer Manager
Field Subcontractors
Operations .
Personnel
e
I
I
I
I
I
SEr!I'I<fl 1. 0
INlRXIJCl'I{fl
'Ille <llarles Ma=n Drum and lagoon Site and the Dockery Site (Ma=n/Dockery Site)
are located in Richm:>rn County, North carolina. 'Ille Ma=n/Dockery Site was
operated as a waste oil recycling and anti-freeze manufacturing facility from
1979 to 1982. Following investigations by the North carolina Department of Hurran
Resources (!HR) and the United states Environm:mta1 Protection Agercy (EPA), the
Ma=n/Dockery Site was placed on the Nationa1 Priorities List (NPL) in 1987. An I Administrative Order by Consent between the EPA and the Respornents, Clark
F.quipment carpany and Cram Cork and Sea1 carpany, dated April 13, 1988, made
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
provisions for a Remedial Investigation and Feasibility Study (RI/FS) in order to
define the extent of enviroronenta1 =ntamination if any and to identify and
evaluate remedial alternatives. A RI/FS Work Plan for the Ma=n/Dockery Site was
prepared by the respornents and presumably awroved by EPA on November 11, 1988.
'lhis Project Operations Plan (roP) has been prepared to provide the details of
the Sanpling and Analysis Plan, the Health and Safety Plan, the Pennitting
Requirements, and the Data Manageirent Plan which will be used in =njunction with
the Ma=n/Dockery, Site Work Plan to accanplish the RI/FS.
1.1 RJRIC6E OF lllE mo.nx::I' OPmATICRl PU\N
'lhe rop has been developed to provide the details of the sampling and analysis
procedures, health and safety maintenance during field operations, pennitting
requirements and data rnanageirent. 'lhis docurrent includes quality control
procedures for each type of sampling as well as the Data Collection Quality
Ass1,JranCe Plan for the awroved work. 'lhe procedures detailed in this . POP have
been developed to ensure that the fie1d and laboratory data are sufficient to
adequately detennine the nature and extent of contamination in each media, the
hydrogeologic characteristics of the site, the potential for =ntaminant
migration and the threat to p.iblic health and the envirornnent.
roP. 1 1-1 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.2 SI'IE IE5CRIPI'IClf
'lhe Ma=iyD:x:kecy Site is located awroxilnately 1.6 miles sc:iut:m.est of Cordova,
North carolina an:i .76 miles east of the Fee Dee River on state Road 1103. 'Ihe
Macon an:i D:x:kecy properties are not contiguous. 'lhe D:x:kecy property is
located awroxilnately 500 feet oorth of the Macon property on the west side of
state Road 1103 (Figure 1). 'lhe canbined area for the two sites is approxill'ately
17 acres.
Detailed descriptions of the !Xlysiograptlc dlaracteri.stics of the site are
provided in Section 1. 2 of the Ma=iyD:x:kecy Site Worlc Plan, November 1988. Also
included in the Work Plan are descriptions of the stnictures, tanks an:i lagoons
present on the site.
1. 3 SITE HISroRY
Fran 1979 to 1982, Mr. Olarles Macon operated a waste oil reclanation an:i anti-
freeze manufacturing facility at the Macon property on state Road 1103. Dnnns
containing waste paints, solvents, acids an:i bases were also received an:i stored
on site. Waste oils were collected in eleven unlined lagoons on the Macon ·
property an:i one unlined lagoon on the D:x:kecy property.
'Ihe North carolina Depart:Irent of Human Resources (CHR) Solid an:i Hazardous Waste
Management Branch first inspected the site in the fall of 1980. 'Ihe details of
subsequent investigations an:i actions by both CHR an:i the EPA are detailed in
Section 1.3. of the Macon/D:x:kecy Site Work·· Plan, November 1988. 'Ihe Work Plan -.
also provides details of quantities an:i types of waste materials rem:wed from the
site during clean-up operations carpleted in January,1984.
roP.l 1-2 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
QUADRANGLE 1.0CA:iCI~
ICXlO 0 1000
ROCKINGHAM, N.C.
N3452.5-W7945l7.5
SCALE 1:24000 1956
2000 l000 4000 5000 6000 7000 FEIT
CONTOUR INTERVAL 10 FEET
DATUM IS MEAN SEA LC':EL
MACON/ DOCKERY
SITE
RICHMOND COUNTY
NORTH CAROLINA
FIGURE I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2 .1 S1IMPLilG CJl7ERl1IHil'
SErl'IOI 2.0
FIElD S1IMPLilG PIAN
'lhe Ma=n/Dockery Site saIIplirg program has been developed to asses::; potential
=ntamination, if arr:t, of the soil, grrun:iwater, surface water, sediment arrl any
remainin;J contaminant sources en:nmtered on site. 'lhe investigation will
include 1113.gnetaneter arrl soil gas sw:veys as well as direct saIIplirg to assist
in detenninin;J the extent of possible =ntamination on site.
'lhe 1113.gnetaneter sw:vey is diso1ssed in Section 2.2 arrl will be used to identify
areas where clnims, tanks, or other rretallic vessels have been buried. 'lhe
sw:vey grid essentially covers the entire site except the heavily wooded areas
arrl builclin;Js where waste or =ntainer burial ..nild not have been practical.
Soil saIIplirg will serve two p.irposes: to determine the extent, if any, of
=ntaminated soil remainin;J on-site arrl to characterize the site geologically.
Section 2.3 diso·sses the chemical analyses that will be perfonned to determine
if the soil is =ntaminated by arr:t of the chemical =nstituents on the Target
Crnpourrl List ('ICL) sho.m in Table 1. Geologic characteristics will be analyzed
in a=rdance with the procedures cutlined in Section 2.3. of the Ma=!VDockery
Site Work Plan, November 1988.
Sedirrent saIIplirg, diso1ssed in Section 2.4, will be perfonned to determine to
what extent, if arr:t, the sediments IIOVirg ·in the streams surrourxlin;J the site
have been =ntaminated.
Section 2.5 diso1sses surface water saIIplirg which will be =nducted to
determine if surface water is =ntaminated arrl if =ntaminants are migratirg
offsite via surface water transport. Sanples will be • taken frcm the streams
surrourxlin;J the site arrl frcm the pond downstream of the Ma=n site.
'lhe grrun:iwater saIIplirg program, disa1ssed in Section 2.6, will address
potential grrun:iwater =ntamination. If grrun:iwater =ntamination is present,
IOP.2 2-1 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
TABLE 1
Target Compound List (TCL) and
Contract Required Quantitation Limits (CRQL)
guantitation Limits
Volatiles Water Low Soil/Sediment
ug/L ug/kg
1. Chloromethane 10 10
2. Bromomethane 10 10
3. Vinyl Chloride 10 10
4. Chloroethane 10 10
5. Methylene Chloride 5 5
6. Acetone 10 10
7. Carbon Disulfide 5 5
8. 1, 1-Dichloroethene 5 5
9. 1, 1-Dichloroethane 5 5
10. 1,2-Dichloroethene ( total) 5 5
11. Chloroform 5 5
12. 1,2-Dichloroethane 5 5
13. 2-Butanone 10 10
14. 1, 1, ! -Trichloroethane 5 5
15. Carbon Tetrachloride 5 5
16. Vinyl Acetate 10 10
17. Bromodichloromethane 5 5
18. 1,2-Dichloropropane 5 5
19. cis-1,3-Dichloropropene 5 5
20. Trichloroethene 5 5
21. Dibromochloromethane 5 5
22. 1, 1,2-Trichloroethane 5 5
23. Benzene 5 5
24. trans-1,3-Dichloropropene 5 5
25. Bromoform 5 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
TABLE 1
(continued)
Target Compound List (TCL) and
Contract Required Quantitation Limits (CRQL)
Volatiles
26. 4-Methyl-2-pentanone
27. 2-Hexanone
28. Tetrachloroethene
29. Toluene
30. 1, 1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane
31. Chlorobenzene
32. Ethyl Benzene
33. Styrene
34. Xylenes (Total)
Semi vol a tiles
35. Phenol
36. bis(2-Chloroethyl)ether
37. 2-Chlorophenol
38. 1,3-Dichlorobenzene
39. 1,4-Dichlorobenzene
40. Benzyl alcohol
41. 1,2-Dichlorobenzene
42. 2-Methylphenol
43. bis(2-Chloroisopropyl) ether
44. 4-Methylphenol
Quantitation Limits
Water
ug/L
10
10
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Low Soill'.'.'.Sediment
ug/kg
.10
10
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a
TABLE 1
(continued)
Target Compound List (TCL) and
Contract Required Quantitation Limits (CRQL)
Quantitation Limits
Semi volatiles Water Low Soili'.Sedimen t
ug/L ug/kg
45. N-Nitroso-di-n-dipropylamine 10 330
46. Hexachloroethane 10 330
47. Nitro benzene 10 330
48. lsophorone 10 330
49. 2-Nitrophenol 10 330
50. 2,4-Dimethylphenol 10 330
51. Benzoic acid 50 1600
52. bis(2-Chloroethoxy)methane 10 330
53. 2,4-Dichlorophenol 10 330
54. 1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene 10 330
55. Naphthalene 10 330
56. 4-Chloroaniline 10 330
57. Hexachlorobutadiene 10 330
58. 4-Chloro-3-methylphenol 10 330
(para-chloro-meta-cresol)
59. 2-Methylnaphthalene 10 330
60. Hexachlorocyclopentadiene 10 330
61. 2,4,6-Trichlorophenol 10 330
62. 2,4,5-Trichlorophenol 50 1600
63. 2-Chloronaphthalene 10 330
64. 2-Nitroaniline 50 1600
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE 1
(continued)
Target Compound List (TCL) and
Contract Required Quantitation Limits (CRQL)
Quantitation Limits
Semi volatiles Water Low Soil/Sediment
ug/L ug/kg
65. Dimethylphthalate 10 330
66. Acenaphthylene 10 330
67. 2,6-dinitrotol uene 10 330
68. 3-Nitroaniline 10 1600
69. Acenaphthene 10 330
70. 2 ,4-Dinitrophenol 50 1600
71. 4-Nitrophenol 50 1600
72. dibenzofuran 10 330
73. 2,4-Dini trotoluene 10 330
74. Diethyphthalate 10 330
75. 4-Chlorophenyl-phenyl ether 10 330
76. Flourene 10 330
77. 4-Nitroaniline 50 1600
78. 4,6-Dinitro-2-methylphenol 50 1600
79. N-nitrosodiphenylamine 10 .. 330
80. 4-Bromophenyl-phenylether 10 330
81. Hexachlorobenzene 10 330
82. Pentachlorophenol 50 1600
83. Phenanthrene 10 1600
84. Anthracene 10 330
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
TABLE 1
(continued}
Target Compound List (TCL) and
Contract Required Quantitation Limits (CRQL}
guantitation Limits
Semi volatiles Water Low SoiliSedimen t
ug/L ug/kg
85. Di-n-butylphthalate 10 330
86. Flouranthene 10 330
87. Pyrene 10 330
88. Bu tylbenzyl ph th ala te 10 330
89. 3,3' -Dichlorobenzidine 20 660
90. Benzo(a)anthracene 10 · .330
91. Chrysene 10 330
92. bis( 2-Ethylhexyl )ph th ala le 10 330
93. Di-n-octlphthalate 10 330
94. Benzo(b)fluoranthene 10 330
95. Benzo(k)flou~ranthene 10 330
96. Benzo(a)pyrene 10 330
97. Indeno( 1,2,3-cd)pyrene 10 330
98. Dibenz(a,h)anthracene 10 330
99. Benzo(g, h ,i )perylene 10 330
100. alpha-BHC 0.05 8.0
101. beta-BHC 0.05 8.0
102. delta-BHC 0.05 8.0
103. gamma-BHC (Lindane) 0.05 8.0
104. Heptachlor 0.05 8.0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE 1
(continued)
Target Compound List (TCL) and
Contract Required Quanlitalion Limits (CRQL)
Quanlitalion Limits
Semi volatiles Water Low SoilL'.'.Sedimen t
ug/L ug/kg
105. Aldrin 0.05 8.0
106. Heptachlor epoxide 0.05 8.0
107. Endosulfan I 0.05 8.0
108. Dieldrin 0.10 16.0
109. 4,4'-DDE 0.10 16.0
110. Endrin 0.10 16.0
111. Endosulfan II 0.10 16.0
112. 4-4'-DDD 0.10 16.0
113. Endosulfan sulfate 0.10 16.0
114. 4,4'-DDT 0.10 16.0
115. Methoxychlor 0.5 80.0
116. Endrin ketone 0.10 16.0
117. aipa-Chlordane 0.5 80.0
118. gamma-Chlordane 0.5 80.0
119. Toxaphene 1.0 160.0
120. Aroclor-1016 0.5 80.0
121. Aroclor-1221 0.5 80.0
122. Aroclor-1232 0.5 80.0
123. Aroclor-1242 0.5 80.0
124. Aroclor-1248 0.5 80.0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE 1
(continued)
Target Compound List (TCL) and
Contract Required Quantitation Limits (CRQL)
Semi vol a tiles
125. Aroclor-1254
126. Aroclor-1260
Quantitation Limits
Water
ug/L
1.0
1.0
Low Soil/Sediment
ug/kg
160.0
160.0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Analyte
Aluminum
Antimony
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Cacium
Chromium
Cobalt
·Copper
Iron
Lead
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Nickel
Potassium
Seleium
Silver
Sodium
Thallium
Vanadium
Zinc-
Cyanide
TABLE 1
(continued)
Inorganic Target Analyte List (TAL)
Contract Required Detection Limit (1.2)
ug/L mg/kg
200 10
60 3.0
10 0.50
200 10
5 0.25
5 0.25
5000 250
10 0.50
50 2.5
25 1.2
100 5.0
5 0.25
5000 250
15 0.75
0.5 0.02
4() 2.0
5000 250
5 0.25
10 0.50
5000 250
10 0.50
50 2.5
20 1.0
20 1.0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ii
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Analyte
Aluminum
Antimony
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Cacium
Chromium
Cobalt
Copper
Iron
Lead
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Nickel
Potassium
Seleium
Silver
Sodium
Thallium
Vanadium
Zinc-
Cyanide
TABLE 1
(continued)
Inorganic Target Analyte List (TAL)
Contract Required Detection Limit (1.2)
ug/L mg/kg
200 10
60 3.0
10 0.50
200 10
5 0.25
5 0.25
5000 250
10 0.50
50 2.5
25 1.2
100 5.0
5 0.25
5000 · 250
15 .!0.75
0:5 0.02
40 2,0
5000 250
5 0.25
10 0.50
5000 250
10 0.50
50 2.5
20 1.0
20 1.0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the sanplin:;J program will assist in cleterminirg the extent of groun::lwater
=ntamination an:I. definin:;J the vertical an:I. horizontal extent of the groun::lwater
=ntamination plume. '!he groun::lwater sanplin:;J program will involve sanplin:;J
existin:;J an:I. newly con.structed \<lells. Sanples will be analyzed for 1CL
parameters, pi, specific oon::luctance, an:I. t:errper,,ture. Grournwater level
measurements will be made to determine the direction of groun::lwater flo.r.
In addition to the =tine environmental media sanplin:;J disc1ssed in the above
paragrcq:ns, contamination sooroe sanplin:;J is aah'essed in the Field Sanplin:;J
Plan. Section 2. 7, waste Sanpli.rq Program, di sa :sses the sanplin:;J to be
perfonned at lagoon 10 an:I. in tanks remainin:;J on the site. lagoon 10 will be
analyzed for 1CL parameters. Sanples collected fran tanks will urrlergo waste
characterization to detennine the awropriate Jrethod of disposal for the tank
contents.
Soil gas sanplin:;J, disc1ssed in Section 2.8, will be perfonned to help detennine
the location of m::>nitorin:;J \<lells. Soil gas results will be used to detennine the
general extent of soil arrljor groun::lwater contamination rut the soil gas survey
will not be used to overrule the installation of any \<lells or borings designated
in the Werle Plan.
several analytical laboratories both certified an:I. non-certified urrler EPA's
Certified laboratory Program (CT.Pl are bein:;J considered to fulfill the
laboratory requirelTents of the field sanplin:;J program. . QN<;t:; plans for two of
the laboratories are given in A[:t)emix A. Other labs not yet identified nay
also be considered. A non-certified laboratory will be selected only upon
ai:proval of the lab's QN<;t:; plan by the EPA.
FOP.2
Sauplfr,g On;ideraticns
Certain procedures will awly to all sanples collected in the field. It
is the p.irpose of this section to disa1ss these generic considerations.
Althalgh types of sanple containers necessary for various parameters on
the 1CL will be specified by the selected laboratory, pennissible types of
sanple containers for various parameters are given in Table 2. '!he arramt
2-2 4262-1-1000
..
I TABLE 2
llEQJIBEl <INIAINERS, PRF.Scl{VAI!W 'ImtlIQIES. Ni> lllU)JlC Tn1ES
I Qmainerl Preservaci0n ltadmn Ix,~ t.1me
I 8lcter:l.al Tescs:
Cclifom, fecal and total P, G Ccol, 4"c, 0.008% ~~~ 6 lwrs
I Fecal stteptoaxd P, G Ccol, 4 •c, 0.008% .Naz 61Dn
Iaempmi&-Tes1:S:
Ac1dicy P, G Ccol, 4°C 14 days
I Alkalln1ty P, G Ccol, 4°C 14 days
azmia P, G Ccol, 4°C, 8i&l4 to pB<2 28 days
ll1odm1cal oxygen demmd P, G Ccol, 4°C 48 lx>urs
Bmn1de P, G Ible requmd 28 days
I B1ochm1cal a,cygen demacd, P, G Ccol, 4°C 48 lx>urs
c:artonacea,s
0-1cal a,cygen dmand P, G =· ~&>4 to pB<2
28 days
I Olloride P, G 28 days
Ollodne, total resiche] P, G ?ale ?l!qllired Allalyze 1mned1 ••~y
Ollor P, G Ccol, 4°C 48 lx>urs •
Cyanide, total arv! areoable P, G Ccol, 4°C, Naa! to ~l2, 14 days I to chlorinatiat 0.6g ascarbic add
Fluoride p N:me ?l!qllired 28 days
P, G ~ ~ 8i&l4 to piKl 6 man.tbs
I ltj(ht¢i ion ( pH) . P, G Allalyze 1mnedlately
B;jeldahl and organic P, G._ Ccol, 4°C, 8i&>4 to P!i<2 28 days
nitrcgea
I Metals:
OlmniuDVI P, G Ccol, 4•c 24 tnirs
Hera:y P, G ~ to !Wl 28 days
I M!tals, except c:hmmm VI P, G to pB<2 6 amths
and :aercury
Nl.trate P, G Ccol, 4•c 48 ID:s
Ni~t:ite P, G Ccol, 4 •c, 8i &>4 to plKl 28 days
I Nltrite P, G Ccol, 4•c 48 tnirs
Oil _mid grease G 0>al, 4°C, ~&>4 to piKl 28 days
(kganic c:arlD1 P, G Ccol, 4°C, or Hi&\ to 28 days
I pB<2
Ot th:Jji .... pere P, G Filter 1mned1ately. axil, 4 •c 48 murs
Qtygea, Dl.saolwd Probe G Bottle ad tgp lblllrequmd Allalyze 1mned1atel y
I Whirler do Fiz 011 site mid store 1n dark 8 lx>urs
l!mDla· G 011ly Ccol, 4°C, 8i&\ to pB<2 28 days
Phls..Cun.11 (elf'IIPllta]} G CDol, 4•c 48 IDlra
I Rmi,h:ui..., total P, G CDol, 4°C, 8i&l4 to pB<2 28 days
Besf rhe, total P, G CDol, 4°C 7 days
lles1dre, Pilterable P, G Ccol, 4°C 7 days
IIPsidrn,lbtfilterable('ISS)P,G CDol, 4°C 7 days
I lles1dre, Sect1eable P, G CDol, 4•c 48 bcun
Pesfdue, riad]e P, G CDol, 4°C 7 daya
SWal p CDol, 4•c 28 daya
I Specific aniucaoi:e P, G CDol, 4•c 28 daya
I TWO -31
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
1!
I
I
I
TABLE 2 (CONT.)
REQJI.RfD <INI'AINERS, PRESERvAIICII mJIIIgJES, AND IDJlOO 'In£S (a:HrllUD)
9.ttare
lblfide
lblff..te
Sdactaa
'D!mpu.au...,a
'lbrb1d1ty
Orptic Tests:
Plqe.able Bal.ocarbcns
PUrgeabl.e ammtic:
hydrocarbans
Acrol.ein ax! ac:rylau.trtl.e
Pt200Ls
llenzid1nes
Phthalate e:stets
Nitrosanlnes
l'CBII, aaylaaitril.e
Nl.troartmatics aDd
1a:,ph,rcae
R>lyma:l.ear amaatic:
hydroc:arbcna
lbloechmi
Ollorinata:1 hydrocarbans
'lCD
'Ibtal organic bal.ogeas
Pestic:1.des Tests:
Pestic:1.des
l.!adiolCRic:al Tests:
Alpha, bee.a and raif.uD
~l:,ethyl.ene (P) or Glas (G)
O:mainerl
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
G, ?eflaa-1.illl!ld
lll!p0lll
G, Teflm-1.illl!ld
aepcm
G, Teflm-1.illl!ld
lll!p0lll
G, D!flm-Uned cap
G, Tef1m-Uned cap
G, Teflm-1.illl!ld cap
G, D!flm-Uned cap
C, Teflm-1.illl!ld cap
c, Teflon-Umd cap
G, Teflm-1.illl!ld cap
· G, Teflm-Uned cap
G, Taflat-1.illl!ld cap c, Teflm-Uned cap
C, Teflm-l.1aed cap
C, D!flm-Uned cap
P, G
CJol, 4•c 28 days
CJol, 4-C, aid zinc a:etaca 7 days
plus sxl1m hydraxide to pH)9
!lane i:equ1rlld . Aaal.ym tnn-:llet•ly
CJol, 4-C 48 lllUra
!lane i:equ1rlld Aaal.ym
0lol., 4•c 48 1:ar.1
Olol, 4•c, 0Jll8% Na.tz~
CJol, 4"C, 0Jll8% Na.zS2o3,
!Cl to pll2
CJol, 4°C, 0.008% Na..z5i~•
.Adjuac pH to 4-5
Olol, 4°C, 0.008% Na.tzOJ
CJol, 4•c, 0-008% Na.z¾OJ
CJol, 4"C ·
CJol, 4°C, stol'II 1n dark,
~~-~¾~
CJol, 4•c, 0.008% ~¾~
Btol'llindark
CJol, 4 "C, 0.008% Na.z5i0J
8to1'II 1n darlt
CJol, 4"C, 0.008% ~¾~
CJol, 4"C
Olol, 4-C, 0.008% 1111.,S.,0..
CJol, 4"C; ll.i!D4 to iitd
CJol, 4 "C, pH 5-9
~ to pff(2.
14-days
14 days
14 days
7 days uatil m:ractim, •
40 days after extractiaa
7 days uatil extractJm
7 days uatil extractJm
40 days after exuact1.on
4U days after aaactim
40 days after excracam
40 days after excract.1cm
40 days after extractJm
40 days after extractJm
40 days after extractJm
40 days after atra:tim
7 days
40 days after attac:im
6 ailaths
NOTE: Sodium thiosulfate is required for chlorinated water only.
TWO -32
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I roP.2
I
of sanple required for each method of analysis will also be a furx::tion of
the laboratocy selected, therefore sanpl.in;J procedures will n:,t specify
am::unts of sanple to be oollected.
In addition to types of sanple oont:ainers, Table 2 gives field
preservation tedmiques required for the varia.is parameters. These
tedmiques will be used in the sanpl.in;J program.
Sa!rple oantainers am a blank dlain of custcxiy form will be shiwed, by the
selected laboratocy to the Macan/DOC,kecy site in a sealed package. 'Ihe
chain of custcxiy documentation process will begin as soon as the package
is opened in the field. 'Ihis process is disa1ssed in detail in the Dita
Collection ~ity Assurance Plan, Section 3.3.
!Jmnediately prior to oollect.in;J each sanple, the sanple oontainers will be
labeled with the follow.in;J infomation:
o r:ate am time of sanple oollection
o Sa!rple identification oode
o Name of person who oollected sanple
o Type of preservative added to sanple
0 Parameters to be analyzed
other media specific infomation, sudl as sanpl.in;J interval, may be
added. 'Ihe sanple identification oode will consist of a job identifi-
cation rruni:ler, a sanple media oode, a sanple location number am a sanple
replicate number. 'Ihe fomat for the sanple identification number is as
follows:
4262-SW-2-l
'Where:
4262 = Macon/Dockery job identification rruni:ler
SW = sanple media oode
2 = sanple location number
l = sanple replicate number
2-3 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
Sa!Iple media codes are SW for surface water sanples, GW for groumwater
sanples, SID for se:llirent sanples, am. SL for soil sanples. 'lhe sanple
location rnnnber on the label will u.1nespcad to the sanple location
mmi:>ers assigned on the field site map.
If it is detennined durin;J the field sanplin;J program that additional
sanples are neeied in locations other than those designated in the Field
Sa!Iplin;J Plan, then the followin;J procedure will ~ly.
1. Collect sanple in a=rdanoe with the ~rq:iriate media sanplin;J
procedure in the Field Sa!Iplin;J Plan.
2. Assign a sanple identification code usin;J the next highest sanple
location number.
3. Mark location where sanple was oollected with a stake, if possible,
am. write the sanple identification code on the stake.
4. Mark location where sanple was oollected on the field site plan usin;J
the next highest sanple location rnnnber.
Environmental sanples will be packaged in oontainers am. shippin;J
packages provided by the ~roved laboratory. Sa!Iples will be shipped
fran the site to the laboratory via overnight delivery. Hazardous
material sanples, such as th06e oollected fran tanks or drums, will be
packed am. shipped in a=rdanoe with 49 CFR 172.'
~ SURIIEY
A magnetaieter survey wili be oon:lucted as described in section 2. 2. 5,
Magnetaneter SUrvey, of the MacoryD:x::kecy Site Work Plan, November 1988. 'lhe
survey will assist in identifyin;J areas where drums, tanks, or other metallic
vessels may have been b.Jried.
roP.2 2-4 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
The magnetaneter survey will be con:iucted usirg a uniMag II portable proton
Magnetaneter, 1'b:lel G-846. Readin;Js will be collected an a grid across the site,
with station spacirg l'Xlt exceedirg 50 feet (Figures 2, 3, 4 & 5). Actual grid
spacirg will be reduced in suspect areas identified in a backgroun:l infonnation
seartn and an-site LE!O:JJµ Id j 5SaJ"Y:lE!.
The grid coordinates will be collected at the tine of the Magnetaneter SULvey
usirg total station survey equipnent to detennine bearirg and distance on the
grid.
KJP.2
2.2.1 SULvey Pu ,:ebJLP
Prior to initiatirg the magnetareter survey, the grid will be established
in the field. 'Ihe grid will include only the open areas of the site
since trees and ruildirgs bl=k the potential for burial. 'Ibis will be
perfonned by establishirg a base line alorg one perimeter of the site with
v.'IXXi stakes set at a fifty foot spacirg. After establishirg the baseline
the total station survey instrument will be positioned at the first fifty
foot pin on the baseline and turned 90" to establish the first .line for
the magnetareter survey.
At this point the first run will be perfonned with the magnetareter.
Distances will be detennined with the total station and communicated
between the two person field team via walkie-talkie. Bearirg, distance
and ganuna readirgs will be recoroed by the full station instrurrent
q:ierator in a field J'Dtebook.
Upon oc:rrpletion of eadJ. run, the results will be reviewed to detennine the
"leCeSS;.ty of additional stations alorg that run.
When no additional stations are deerred "leCeSsary on the first run, the
total station instrument will be IIOITed fifty feet down the baseline and
the procedure will be repeated. If situations arise where the survey run
is blocked by ruildirgs, trees, or other oostacles in the line of sight, a
2-5 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
-,\-
UPPER MACON r---a-1
SITE----i 0 0 I
r-----, : lib D I ocr
I
I
I O
L----
I I
I I
I I
0
lo
I I
I Q I
't.-L.DWER-M~N
SITE
VICINITY MAP
BLDG. 3
AR!,A,\--
OUSE
+ ..\-
+ -\-
-\"
MAGNETOMETER SURVEY GRID
§Ai~ UPPER MACON SITE
1883 FIGURE 2 .
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
~ EXIST. MONITORING WELL
' • • • WOODS LINE
:::::=:::: R DAD + MAGNETOMETER
SURVEY POINT
;lf-ALL TANKS ARE
ABOVE GROUND.
-r
-\-
+
+ -r
LA40(:)J"io ,\-
+ + +
-\-+
+ ..;.
+ ...;-
4-+-+-
+ -r +-
-\-+-+
+ -+ -r-
t-+ -t .\-.\--+ -\'" +
+
-+
UPPER MACON r-----7 0 SITE --__.. 0 0 · I
: fa 0
1
., ~
I o r'l
I <.J I
r----7
I I
I I
I I I O I L ___ _
le:,
I I
I I
tl.OWER M;CON ..
SfTE
VICINITY MAP
MAGNETOMETER
SURVEY GRID
LOWER MACON SITE
FIGURE 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
~ WOODS LI NE --+
ROAD
MAGNETOMETER
SURVEY POI NT
,-0---LLOWER
I I DOCKERY
I I SITE
I I
I I
I I
I I
. L__ - -_j ----7
UPPER
DOCKERY
SITE--
I
I
I
I
I
sRll03
I L ____ _J
VICINITY MAP
X
X
X
.x x
X )(
><
X X
)(
X X
X
X
)(
SCALE
I I I I I I I
0 50 100 150 FEET
MAGNETOMETER SURVEY GRID
fMAINl UPPER DOCKERY SITE
C,,..a,1:....:.I Fl GU RE 4
I LEGEND
~ WOODS LINE
I ---ROAD -+ MAGNETOMETER
I SURVEY POINT
I
I
I q:qe:. I 'X. )(
)(
I
I ')(.
)(
I )(
')(
I )(
I )(.
")(.
11-------
1
I
I
I
r-0 -7 -LOWER
I I DOCKERY
I I SITE
I
I
I
I L ____ .J
r ----1
I I
I UPPER
DOCKERY
SITE----' I
I
I
")(.
)(.
)(.
I s~ no3 SCALE I 1 6 1 ~o 1 1hd 150 FEET
L ----_j MAGNETOMETER SURVEY GRID
I VICINITY MAP §AI~ LOWER DOCKERY SITE
-------------:-___ _j1___'>1_n_:i ___ F __ l:...::G:...::U:..:.R:..::E:........::5:_ ____ ..2:~~~---_J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I . IOP.2
I
re., bench-mark will be situated on the adjacent run, and the total station
:instrument will be relocated to caiq:,lete the run.
2.2.2 Dea:ntaminatim of Magnetaoeter SUrvey ]:}J1ipnent
Instruirents used durin::J the magnetaneter survey will be wrai:ped in
polyethylene wile on site.
All rods, poles, ham tools, etc. will be decx:Jntaminated by washirg with
~te-free soap and tap water, rinsin::J with tap water and allowin::J to
air dry.
2.2.3 QC far Magnetaoeter SUrvey
'lhe quality =ntrol plan for the magnetareter survey has been developed to
ensure the reliability of the results.
All field n-easurements will be rea:>rded in the field note book. 'lhese
results will be presented in the followin::J omer:
SURVEY RUN # DISTANCE READING
All surveys will be tied into established on the base map to verify ·the
integrity of the location information.
To ensure the acx::uracy of the magnetaneter readin:Js, all results will be
verified by repeatin::J the measurement procedure prior to recordin::J.
To oorrect for diurnal variation in the magnetic field, backgroun::i
readin::Js will be oollected on a two hrur interval fran a position off
site.
2-6 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
roP.2
SOIL SllMPLIHi lRXirulM
2.3.1 SUrfaoe Soil Saup] i RJ Pl.• udu .....
SUrfaoe soil sanples will be collected fran the locations specified on
Figures 6, 7, 8 & 9 as cut.lined in Sectioo 2. 2. 2, Soil Sanplil'IJ, of the
Macayikx::kecy Site Work Plan, November 1988.
M:lst of the soil sanpliRJ locations designated in the Work Plan are in
areas 1.-here a vegetative turf is established. At these locations a clean
stainless steel trc:Me1 will be used to carefully rem::,ve the turf. When
the clean soil surface is exposed, a hole will be advanced to a depth of
two feet usiRJ a han:l auger. All au::ier cuttiRJs will be collected arrl
carefully placed in a glass or teflon coated stainless steel pan to be
mixed (m. o.a11fX>Sited) prior to filliRJ the sanple containers.
Sanple mixi.rq will be perforna:l i.Jmoodiately after the auger hole is
CCl!i)lete. A stainless steel spoon will be used for mixi.rq. '!he soil will
be scraped frcxn the sides, corners, arrl b:lttan of the pan, rolled to the
middle of the pan arrl gently mixed. '!he sanple will then be quartered arrl
separated into the fa.ir corners of the mixi.rq pan. F.adJ. quarter of the
sanple will be mixed individually, then rolled into the center of the
mixi.rq pan, arrl gently mixed again.
When the soil has been thoroughly mixed arrl is as hcm:,geneous as possible
it will be divided arrl placed in sanple containers as follows.
2-7 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
-X
EXIST. MONITORING WELL
WOODS LINE
ROAD
SAMPLE LOCATIONS
DLAGOON I
"' 0
II.I
f--::,
0 a:
(}
LAGOON 2 ~ SUSPECTED -$2
~AAEA X X
II.I
f--<t f--U)
,,1,_ {)LAGOON 3 °l'" ALL TANKS ARE
ABOVE GROUND
LAGOON
6
AGOON
LA
·o O
LAGOON 76 BLOG. 2
. TANK 9<l::::::::J
X 1AGOON 9 BLOG , / X
SCALE I I I I
nrARM
l . rOUSE
_.I
X
X
0 50 100 150 FEET
,-------. SURFACE SOIL SAMPLES
fMAINl UPPER MACON SITE C:.11-193:....::J
FIGURE 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
~ EXIST. MONITORING WELL
~~ WOODS LINE
::::::=::: R OAO
X SAMPLE LOCATIONS
~ SUSPECTED ~ AREA
¼ALL TANKS ARE
ABOVE GROUND.
I c::::::JLAGOON II
I
I
I
I
I
UNUSED
DIKED
LAGOONS
~Al~ 1893
SCALE
I I I I I I
0 50 100 150 FEET
SURFACE SOIL SAM LES
LOWER MACON SITE
FIGURE 7
'•
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
, I
'
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
,-v,,v-,, V.00 D S LI NE --ROAD
X SAMPLE LOCATIONS
r:77)., SUSPECTED '(Ld AREA
@AI~ 1893
X
X X
ST ATE ROUTE 1103
SCALE
I I I I I I I
0 50 100 150 FEET
SURFACE SOIL SAMPLES
UPPER DOCKERY SITE
FIGURE e
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
,.,...,.,,..,.. WOODS LINE -ROAD -
X SAMPLE LOCATIONS
@ SUSPECTED
AREA
LAGOON
X
SCALE
1111111
0 50 100 150 FEET
fMA.INl SURFACE SOIL SAMPLES -LOWER DOCKERY SITE
Casea:...:.J FIGURE 9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I roP.2
I
a:m'AINER PARllMEI'ER
Volatiles Glass with teflan lined septum
Glass or polyethylene
Glass or polyethylene
Semivolatiles ard pesticides
Ioorganics
F.ach saJ!ille container will be carefully filled as full as possible to
eliminate free air space. 'Ihe container rray be gently tar:ped durIDJ the
procedure to assist in fillIDJ each jar caipletely.
2.3.2 Decxrrt:aminaticn far SUrface Soil Sanpl.IDJ »J,1ipnem-
SanplIDJ equiµnent arrl mixin;J equipnent will be decontaminated between
each saJ!illIDJ location. 'lhe decontamination for the surface soil saJ!illIDJ
equiµnent will be aa::aiplished USIDJ the follCWIDJ procedure.
1. Wash with ~te.-free detergent arrl tap water USIDJ a brush to
renove particulate rratter arrl surface film.
2. Rinse equiµnent thorrughly with tap water.
3. Rinse equiµnent thorrughly with distilled water.
4. Rinse equiµnent twice with pesticide grade isopropanol arrl allow to
air dry.
5. Wrap equiµnent carpletely with altnnimnn foil to prevent contamination
durIDJ storage and/or transport to the field.
Water rin.seate fran the decontamination procedure will be contained in a
55 gallon drum arrl analyzed for waste characteristics to detennine the
C!RJropriate trethod of disp,sal. 'Ihe final distilled water rin.seate will
be saJ!illed separately arrl analyzed for TCL paraneters to detennine the
effectiveness of decontamination.
2-8 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I FOP.2
I
2.3.3 QC far Surface Soil Sallplin:J
'lhe quality =ntrol plan for surface soil sanplin:J has been develqied to
ensure proper sanple collection arxi harrllin:J, proper field documentation
of sanplin:J procedures, arxi proper packagin:J of sanples prior to
transport.ing to the laboratory.
All surface soil sanple collection activities will be documented by the
field personnel at the tine of collection in a permanent field log book.
'lhe field log will irci.ude the information provided on the sanple label
as -well as the sanplin:J equipnent used. 'lhe sanples will be labeled in
a=rclance with Section 2.1.
Field preservation of sediment sanples requires ooolin:J to abrut 4 • c.
All sediment sanples will be cooled immediately after collection.
Shi~in:J =ntainers will be prepared for transportation to the laboratory
in a=rclance with Section 3.3 Sarcple Olstody.
'lhe laboratory accuracy will be verified throogh the use of 1113.trix sanples
spiked to specific cooc:entrations of known =nstituents. A mininrum of 10%
of all sediment sanples sent to the laboratory will be 1113.trix spike
sanples. Final rinseate fran sanplin:J equipnent decontamination will
also be sanpled arxi analyzed in a=rclance with Section 2. 3. 2.
2.3.4 SU!Eurfaoe Soil Sallplin:J Pr:o mrre
SUbsurface soil sanples will be collected fran the locations specified on
Figures 10, 11, 12 & 13 as ootlined in Section 2.3.3., Mditional Soil
Borin;Js, in the Maoon/D:x:kery Site Worlc Plan, November 1988.
SUbsurface soil sanples will be collected usin:J hollow stem augers arxi
thin-walled Shelby sanplin:J tubes at 5-foot intervals fran the surface of
the groun:l to the watertable.
2-9 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
-$2 EXIST MONITORING WELL
--WOODS LINE
ROAD
BLAGOON I N
"' 0
-$.~ 2
A f)LAGOON 2
2 •
(?-~·
uJ t-=> 0 a:
uJ t-el t-u,
LAGOON
6
LAGOON 4
~
8
BA
AGOON
LEGEND (CONT.) * ALL TANKS ARE ABOVE GROUND
♦ NEW MONITORING WELL
• NEW SOIL BORING
SCALE
I I I I I I I
0 50 100 150 FEET
TANK 7
ct::::::J
BLDG. 3
BLDG.
4
FARM
HOUSE
SUBSURFACE SOIL SAMPLES,
NEW MONITORING WELLS
~~M-A-1-~~
1893:...:J
AND SOIL BORINGS
UPPER MACON srTE
FIGURE 10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
~ EXIST. MONITORING WELL
........ ~ WOODS LINE
_::::::=::= ROAD
~ NEW MONITORING WELL
• NEW SOIL BORING
-t ALL TANKS ARE
ABOVE GROUND.
t::PLAGOONII
e LAGOON 10
UNUSED
DIKED
LAGOONS
SCALE
I I I I I I I
0 50 100 150 FEET
SUBSURFACE SOIL SAMPLES,
NEW MONITORING WELLS
~\AI~ 1893
AND SOIL BORINGS
LOWER MACON SITE
FIGURE 11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
' •• •" 'AOODS LINE -ROAD -
-$-NEW MONITORING WELL
ST ATE ROUTE 1103
SCALE
I I I I I I I
0 50 100 150 FEET
SUBSURFACE SOIL SAMPLES,
NEW MON !TORI NG WELLS
UPPER DOCKERY SITE
FIGURE 12
I LEGEND
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1•
rvvv,,-,. WOODS LI NE
::;::::=:::: ROAD
♦ NEW MONITORING WELL
• NEW SOIL BORING
~16
SCALE
I I I I I I I
0 50 100 150 FEET
SUBSURFACE SOIL SAMPLES,
NEW MONITORING WELLS
AND SOIL BORING -LOWER DOCKERY SITE
FIGURE 13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I roP.2
I
Generally, the sanplinJ prooedure is in a=rclarx:e with AS'lM D1587-74 am
will be performed as follows:
Prior to sanplinJ the soil, aey vegetative turf will be carefully re=ved
usinJ a stainless steel trowel. When a clean soil surface is exposed, a
Shelby 'l\lbe will be driven 30-i.rd1eS into the gromd am jacked CA.It usinJ
the drill rig. After rem::,vinJ the sanplinJ tube fran the gromd, a
borehole will be advan::ed usinJ hollow stan a~ to a depth of five
feet. At this point a Shelby 'l\lbe attached to the rod will be 1~
down inside the a~ am driven into the umisturbed soil below the
a~. lllese auger ~ am Shelby 'l\lbe sanplinJ techniques will
be performed as described aJ:x::r.,e at five foot depth intervals fran the
surface to the top of the watertable.
Imnediately after rem::,vinJ the Shelby 'l\lbe fran the gromd, the sanple
will be withdrawn fran the tube using a stainless steel spoon, trowel or
piston sanpler. As the sanple is rem::,ved fran the tube it will be place:i
in a glass or teflon coated stainless steel pan to be mixed prior to
fillin} the sanple containers.
Sanple mixing "shruld be performed inure:liately after renoval frcxn the
Shelby 'l\lbe. A stainless steel spoon will be used for mixing. 'Ihe soil
will be scraped fran the sides, oorners, am bottan of the pan, rolled to
the middle of the pan am gently mixed. 'Ihe sanple will then be quartered
am separated into the four oorners of the mixing pan. Each quarter of
the sanple will be mixed individually follc,winJ the same prooedures
ootlined aJ:x::r.,e. Each quarter will then be rolled into the center of the
mixing pan, am gently mixed again.
When the soil sanple has been thoroughly mixed am is as ho!Tcgeneous as
possible, it will be divided am place:i in sanple oontainers as follows:
2-10 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I l'UP.2
I
Container Paranet.er
Volatiles Glass with teflon lined septum
Glass or polyethylene
Glass or polyethylene
Semivolatiles arxl pesticides
In:>rganics
Fa.ch sanple cantainer will be carefully filled as full as possible to
eliminate free air space. 'lhe cantainer may be gently ta['Ped durin;J this
procedure to assist in fillin;J each jar caipletely.
2.3.5 Decr:.ntaminatim far Subsurface Sallplin;J l')J1ipnent
All sanplin;J arxl mixin;J equipnent will be decontaminated between uses.
Decontamination of subsurface sanplin;J equiprent will include the drill
rig, augers flights arxl Shelby 'l\Jbes.
'Ihe drill rig will be cleaned prior to arriv~ onsite with a steam
generator. 'lhe dO'<Jl'Hlele equipnent will be steam cleaned onsite between
each sanplin;J location. 'lhe Shelby 'l\Jbes will be decontaminated by the
followin;J procedure.
1. Wash the Shelby 'l\Jbes with Ei1osp1ate-free detergent arxl tap water
usin;J a brush to renove a:ey particulate matter or surface film.
2. Rinse. equipnent thoroughly with tap water.
3. Rinse equipnent thoroughly with distilled water.
4. Rinse equipnent twice with pesticide grade i.sq:lrq,anol arxl allow to
air dry.
5. Wrap equipnent caipletely with aluminum foil to prevent contamination
durin;J storage or transport.
water rin.seate fran the decontamination process will be CXllltained in a 55
gallon dnnn arxl analyzed for waste characteristics to detennine the
2-11 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I roP.2
I
~riate method of di srnsaI. 'lhe final distilled water rinseate will
be oantained separately arrl analyzed for TCL parameters to detennine the
effectiveness of decontamination.
2.3.6 QC far SUbsurface Soil SanpliDJ
'lhe quality control plan for subsurface soil sanpliDJ has been developed
to ensure proper sanple collection arrl han:iliDJ, proper field
documentation of procedures arrl equipnent used, arrl proper mixirg arrl
packagiDJ of sanples prior to tran.sportiDJ to the laboratory.
All subsurface soil sanple collection activities will be documented by the
field personnel at the time of collection in a permanent field logbook.
'lhe field logbook will in::lude infonnation provided on the sanple label
arrl will identify all major equipnent used so that it can be traced. All
cleanin;J, maintenance, arrl repair pro et1J"PS will be logged so that they
can be traced to the person perfonnin:J the procedures. All sanples will
be labeled in a=rdance with Section 2 .1.
In addition to the field log, a driller's log will be maintained
througha.it the drilliDJ program, in::ludirg the subsurface soil sanpliDJ.
'!he followiDJ item.s will be in::luded in the drillers log:
o hole mnnber arrl sanpliDJ location
o soil descriptions
o type of drilliDJ equipnent arrl driller
o method of drilliDJ
o drillin;J arrl sanplin;J time
o depth to water table, date arrl time measured
o type of sanplin;J equipnent arrl cleanin;J procedures
o depth of sanplin;J
'lhe drillers' log will provide field documentation of sanplin;J procedures
that will be cross referenced to ensure that field records are consistent.
2-12 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'lhe drillin;J q:ieratiCB1 will be supervised an:i the driller's logs will be
signed daily by field personnel assigned by the Site Manager.
A sanple identificatiCB1 rn.mtier will be placed CB1 eadl sanple label. 'lhe
rn.mtier will =nsist of the job identificatiCB1 code, the sanple media code,
the sanple locatiCB1 rn.mtier, sanple . depth inteI:val, an:i the sanple
replicate rn.mtier. SectiCB1 2 .1 further details the sanple identificatiCB1
rn.mtier.
Field preservatiCB1 of soil sanples requires coolin;J to abrut 4 •c. All
soil sanples will be cooled illlnediately after oollection an:i mi.xin;J.
Shiwin;J oontainers will be prepared for transportatiCB1 to the laboratory
in acoordance with Section 3.3 Sanple Olstody;
'Ille laboratory will be verified through the use of natrix sanples spiked
to specific ooncentrations of known constituents. A mininum of 10% of all
subsurface soil sanples sent to the laboratory will be natrix spike
sanples. Final rinseate fran sanplin;J equipnent deoontamination will be
sanpled in acoordance with Section 2.3.5.
2 .4 SEDIMENl' SIIMPLilC IRlGRllM
'Ihe sed:inent sanplin;J program for the Macon/Dockery Site has been developed to
determine if an:i to what extent sed:inents m:,vin;J through the fluvial systems have
been oontaminated. Eight sed:inent sanples will be oollected in the vicinity of
the locations shown in Figure 14. Cmposite· sanples will be oollected an:i
cxa,if-OSited as described in the follO!,/in;J procedures. Sedinent sanples will be
analyzed for 'lcr. paraneters.
roP.2
2.4.1 stream Sediment: Sanplin;J Pl.c , ab~
'lhe streams to be sanpled at the Maoon/Dockery site are first or seoorxl
order streams an:i are small. Since effective sed:inent sanplin;J is
depen:lent on sanple oollection fran depositional areas, the field
personnel will determine in the field where the best sanplin;J sites are.
'fypical depositional areas are located dc:,,mstream of obstructions in the
2-13 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
QUADRANGLE LOCATION
1000 0 1000
. ROCKINGHAM, N.C.
N3452.5-W7945/7., .
SCALE 1:24000 1956
2000 JOOO 4000 5(XX) &(XX) 70Ql f'EET .
CONTOUR INTERVAL 10 FEET
DATUM IS MEAN SEA LCVEL
SITE
--~ ·-. .
. ...
· MACON / DOCKERY
SITE.
RICHMOND COUNTY
NORTH CAROLINA
"
STREAM SEDIMENT @
SAMPLING LOCATIONS
FIGURE 14 -§Ai~ .
1893 ,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I FOP.2
I
water or turl:w.ent areas. Sanples will be collected in the vicinity of
the sanplil'xJ locations shewn in Figure 14. 'lhe specific sanplil'xJ
locations will be recorded in field logs an:l located an:l numbered on the
field site map.
en::e the sanplil'xJ site has been determined an:l recorded, a m,ifOS~l:e of
the stream seclilrents at the sanplil'xJ location will be collected. 'lhe
sanple will be collected fran the stream bank at water level and(or at the
center of the stream. A clean, stainless steel spoon, or grain scoq> will
be _used to collect the sanple. 'lhe sanple will then be placed in a clean
glass or teflon coated stainless steel tray an:l gently mixed usiixJ the
sanplil'xJ spoon or a clean stainless steel spoon. 'lhe sediment in the pan
will be scraped fran the sides, corners an:l bottan of the pan, rolled to
the m.ickile of the pan an:l gently mixed. 'lhe sanple will then be quartered
an:l m:,ved to the corners of the tray. F.ad'l quarter section will be gently
mixed individually then rolled to the center of the tray an:l mixed again.
'lhe sanple will then be carefully placed in the sanple containers
described in Table 2. For the volatile organics, the sanple container
should be gently tai:p;!d as the sanple is placed in the container an:l the
container should be mipletely filled to eliminate any headspace.
'lhe required sanple quantity arrl subsequent container size is specified by
the laboratory as given in ~ A. F.ad'l sanple will be divided as
follows:
Sanple OJntainer Material
Glass with Teflon lined septum
Glass or Polyethylene
Glass or Polyethylene
Parameter
Volatile Organics
Semi volatiles/Pesticides
Ioorganics
2.4.2 l\:Iv Sediment-. Sanplil'xJ Pu• e'l!rn>
'lhe porrl to be sanpled at the Macon/Dockery Site is not expected to be
mre than 10 feet deep. A cx:a,lfOSite sanple of the porrl sediment will be
collected fran at least three locations in the porrl. 'lhe sediment will be
2-14 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FOP.2
oollected with a "Sludge Judge". 'Ihe "Sludge Judge" is a polyethylene
tube with a sprirg loaded d!eck valve in the bottan section. 'Ihe "Sludge
Judge" will be p.lShed thrc.u;Jh the se:liment, the d!eck valve closed, then
p..illed to the surface with the se:linent-trawed inside the tube. 'Ihe
sanple will be mixed am divided as described in the previc:us section.
2.4.3 Decmtaminati.cn far Sediment: Sanplin:J Jqdpnent-.
Decontamination of the stainless steel sanplirg equipnent will be
aocanplished by usirg the foll<JWin;J procedure.
1. Wash equipnent with ~06fX1ate-free laboratory detergent am tap water
usirg a brush to rerrove any particulate matter or surface filirs.
2. Rinse equiµnent thor=ghly with tap water.
3. Rinse equipnent thor=ghly with distilled water.
4. Rinse equipnent twice with pesticide grade isoprq:ianol am allow to
air dry.
5. Wrap equipnent canpletely with altnninum foil to prevent oontaminatian
durirg storage or transport.
Decontamination for the "Sludge Judge" will be aocanplished usirg the
followirg procedure.
1. Rinse with tap water iimnediately after use to rerrove as lllUdt
particulate matter as possible.
2. Wash with ~te-free detergent am tap water usirg a brush to
rem::,ve any remainirg particulate matter am surface film.
3. Rinse thor=ghly with tap water.
4. Rinse with 10% nitric acid solution.
2-15 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I roP.2
i I
5. Rinse with tap water.
6. Rinse thoroughly with distilled water.
7. Allow to air clcy and wrap with alumirrum foil to prevent contamination
dur~ storage or transport.
Water rinseate fran the decontamination process will be =ntained in a 55
gallon drum and analyzed for waste characteristics to detennine the
awrcpriate method of disp:>5al. 'Ihe final distilled water rinseate will
be =ntained separately and analyzed for 'lCL par.meters to detennine the
effectiveness of decontamination. 'Ihe "Sludge Judge" will not be
decontaminated between sanple locations since the sanple will be a
CULl(X.61\:e.
2.4.4 QC far Sedinpnt-. Sallpl~
'lhe quality control plan for sedinEnt sanpl~ has been developed to
ensure prcper sanple collection and handl~, prcper field documentation
of sanpl~ procedures, and prcper packag~ of sanples prior to
transport~ to the laboratory.
All sedinEnt sanple collection activities will be documented by the field
personnel at the time of collection in a penranent field log book. 'lhe
field log will inclu:le the information provided on the sanple label and
the name of the sanpl~ equipnent used. 'lhe sanples will be labeled in
acx::oraan:ie with section 2.1.
Field preservation of sediment sanples requires cool~ to abc:ut 4 • C.
All sedinEnt sanples will be cooled :!Jmnediately after collection.
ShiJ;l)~ containers will be prepared for transportation to the laboratory
in acx::ordan:le with section 3.3 Sanple Olstody.
2-16 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'Ihe laboratory accuracy will be verified tiu::'cl\qi the use of matrix samples
spiked to specific conoentrations of knc7.m cxnstituents. A minilll.nn of 10%
of all sedirrent samples sent to the laboratory will be matrix spike
simples. Final rinseate fran sant>lin;J equip!Elt. decontamination will also
be simpled am. analyzed for TCL parcmeters in aooorda!Xle with Section
2.3.5.
2 .5 ~ WA'.lm Sl\MPLIN:, FKX,RAM
To detennine if contaminants are migra~ offsite by means of surface water
transport, surface water samples will be collected fran the streams borderin;J the
site am. fran the small p::irrl downstream of the Macon site. A total of eight
surface water samples will be collected. Sanple locations are shown on Figure
15. To prevent sample dilution am. elevated levels of susperrled solids, no
surface water samples will be collected durin;J or inunedi.ately after any major I rain event. Surface water samples will be analyzed for TCL parcmeters. Surface
water samples will be collected either directly with the sample container or with
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a dipper constructed of inert material such as stainless steel, teflon,
p::ilyethylene, or glass. Fac:h surface water sample will be divided into sample
containers required for the different methods of analysis.
Sanple Container
Glass with teflon lined septum
Glass or p::ilyethylene
Glass or p::ilyethylene
Paraireter
Volatiles
Semivolatiles am. pesticides
Inorganics
'Ihe containers for volatiles will be cx:111pletely filled such that a convex
miniscus is fanned allowing no air or head space in the vial.
2.5.1 Sb.&iill Sanplin;J Pre • OOJJ'.'P
Prior to d::lta:ininq a surface water saJlllle fran a stream for semivolatiles,
pesticides, am. inorganics, a dipper will be attached, if necessary, to an
eight foot lorg p::ile to alla.r acx:ess to any p::iint in the stream am. flushed
thorou:Jltly with water fran the stream. To collect a sample, the dipper device
roP.2 2-17 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
~
QUAOAAHGL[ LOCATION
ICIDO 0 1000
• ROCKINGHAM, N.C.
N3452.5-W7945/7.! .
SCALE 1:24000 1956
20XI JQ)0 ,l00) !!000 6IXO ,o:io Ft[I'
CONTOUR INTERVAL 10 FEET
DATUM IS MEAN SEA LCVEL
'
I ~~
~. ~-
SITE ~ .. v\
l:!t!?, I~ '-----/1 ''<\
. ' r_
_· .-f . ..., .
MACON / DOCKERY
SITE
RICHMOND. COUNTY
NORTH CAROLI NA .Q
STREAM \!,
SAMPLING LOCATIONS
FIGURE 15
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
will be sumerse;i with mininal surface dist:urbanoe. When the sample has been
collected in the diwer, it will be gently transferred to the sample containers
to avoid volatilization.
To dJtain a surface water sample frorn a stream for volatiles, the sample will
be collected directly in the sample container if the stream is small enoogh to
allow this, otherwise the sample will be collected with the diwer attadled to
the eight foot lon;J pole then gently transferred to the glass vile.
2.5.2 larl Sanpl..i.nJ PI., • roJrP
A different procedure will be used to sample the small porrl downstream of the
Macon site to account for contaminant stratification in the pond. A vertical
m,µs.i.te will be obtained from the deepest point of the pond by withdraw:ug an
entire vertical column of water us:ug a "Sludge Judge" or similar sampl:ug
device constructed of an inert material sud1 as glass, teflon, stainless steel,
or polyethylene. 'lhe vertical m,µsite will be mixed by gently transferr:ug
the sample to an open polyethylene container. Saitple containers for volatiles,
semivolatiles, pesticides, and inorganics will then be filled directly from the
open polyethylene container us.i.nJ care to avoid agitation of the sample.
2.5.3 Ilea:.lltaminati<n for SUrfaoe Water Sallpl:ug E)J1ipoont
Decontamination of surface water sampl:ug equipnent will be aa:xxiplished by
us.i.nJ the follow:ug procedure:
1. Wash with IilOSiilate-free detergent and tap water as soon as possible after
use us:ug a brush to rem:,ve any partia.tl.ate matter or surface film.
2. Rinse equiprent thoroughly with tap water.
3. Rinse equipnent with 10% nitric acid solution.
4. Rinse equipnent thoroughly with tap water.
IOP.2 2-18 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. Rinse equipnent thorrughly with distilled water.
6. Allow equipnent to air dry.
7. Wrap equipnent catpletely with aluminum foil to prevent contamination
duriig storage or transport.
Rinseate fran the decontamination process will be oont:ained in a 55 gallon dium
arrl analyzed for waste dlaracteristics to detennine the ~rqiriate nethod of
disposal. 'Ihe final distilled water rinseate will be oont:ained separately arrl
analyzed for TCL parameters to detennine the effectiveness of decontamination.
2.5.4 QC for SUrfaoe Water Saq>liig
Quality =ntrol for surface water sampliig will =nsist of traceable
documentation of sample cx:,llection activities, prqier field preservation
techniques, arrl rreasurerrent of sample handliig effectiveness usiig ~ropriate
blank samples.
All surface water sample cx:,llection activities will be documented by the field
personnel at the tine of cx:,llection in a pennanent field log book. 'Ille field
log will include the infornation provided on the sample label as i.ell as the
sampliig equipnent used. SUrface water samples will be labeled at the tine of
sampliig in a=rdanoe with Section 2. 1.
Field preservation of surface water samples beiig sent to the analytical
laboratory will catply with the requirements given in Table 2.
COllected samples will be cx:,oled illlnediately after addi.nq any "lff:essary
preservatives. Shi~iig oont:ainers will then be prepared for transportation
in a=rdanoe with Section 3.3, Sanple Olstcdy.
SUrface water samples tested for field parameters will .be placed in glass jars
illlnediately upon cx:,llection of the sample arrl field tested for pi, specific
conductance, arrl t:atperature.
FOP.2 2-19 4262-1-1000
I
I
Measurenent of sanple han:llirg effectiveness will be aCXX'lll)lished throJgh the I use of trip and field blanks. A minillum of 10% of all surface water sanples
sent to the analytical lab will be blanks. Final rinseate fran sanplirg I equipient decontaminatioo will be sanpled in aexx>rclanoe with Sectioo 2. 5. 3.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
2.6 GlUlNDiAllR SAMPLilC PRX;Rl\M
'1he grc,..irnwater sanplirg program has been develqied to determine to what extent
the grc,..irnwater at the Ma=n/Dockery site has been contaminated and to define the
horizontal and vertical extent of that cxmtaminatioo. '1he sanplirg program will
=nsist of sanplirg existirg and newly =nstructed m:initorirg wells durirg Fhase
I of the investigation, and sanplirg all wells =nstructed durirg Fhase II of the
investigation as outlined in Section 2 of the Work Plan. '1he locations of
existirg and planned wells are presented in Figures 16, 17, 18 and 19. 'lhe
sanplirg program will in::11.Xle =llection of sanples for laboratory analysis,
field analysis of?'{, specific =rrluctance and tenperature, and grc,..irnwater level
rreasurerrents.
FOP.2
2.6.1 ' Grtxlrnwater Sanplirg PrcxY!:JJJn>
All m:initorirg wells will be installed and develqied in aexx>rclanoe with
Section 2.3.6 of the Work Plan. All wells will be p.n:ged prior to
sanplirg to rerrove stagnant water. F\lrge water will be =ntainerized in
drums until after analysis of grc,..irnwater is cxmplete . so that awrq:,riate
di srosal can be determined. Sanples will be =llected with clean closed-
tq:, tefloo ballers and divided as follows:
Container Material
Glass w/teflon sepbnn
Glass or polyethylene
Glass of polyethylene
2-20
Paranet.er
Volatile OJ::ganics
Semi volatiles/Pesticides
Metals
4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
-$2 EXIST MONITORING WELL
WOODS LINE I ► ,., t e • I
ROAD --
DLAGOON I "' 0
LIJ
1--
::i
0 a:
LAGOON LAGOON 4
6
♦ 5 LAGOON
8
BA 0 8 TANK
!5 D . . TANK 4 !5 :~~~=:---. AGOON
. TANK 2 BLDG. I
7
/1._ TANK 8~
LAGOON U BLDG.2
TANK 9C;;:::J
LAt;ON9Q
LEGEND (CONT.) * · ALL TANKS ARE • ABOVE GROUND
-$-NEW MONITORING WELL
SCALE
I I I I I I I
0 !50 100 150 FEET
TANK 7
«:::::J
BLDG. 3
BLDG
4
FARM
HOUSE
LIJ
I-< I-"'
,----NEW MONITORING WELLS
~~ . . UPPER MACON SITE
FIGURE 16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
~ EXIST. MONITORING waL
._____, WOODS LINE
~ ROAD
~ NEW MONITORING WELL
-f ALL TANKS ARE
ABOVE GROUND.
UNUSED
DIKED
LAGOONS
SCALE
I I I I I I I
0 50 100 150 FEET
NEW MONITORING WELLS
LOWER MACON SITE
FIGURE 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
, ...... 'M:JODS LINE -ROAD -
-$-NEW MONITORING WELL
SfATE ROUTE 110'3
SCALE
i i i i i i
0 · 50 100 150 FEET
NEW MON !TORI NG WELLS
UPPER DOCKERY SITE
FIGURE 18 ·
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
--WOODS LINE
ROAD
NEW MONITORING WELL
-+1s
SCALE
t I I t I
0 50 100 150 FEET
~-:-::-:::-:-1 NEW MONITORING WELLS ~~ LOWER. DOCKERY. SIT..E
FIGURE 19
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
roP.2
All sanples will be analyzed for 'ICL parcureters. Field analysis for Iii,
tenp:lrature arrl specific con:iuct:.arD! will be perfonned at the time of
sanplinJ. Field measureoonts will be taken in clean glass oontainers.
CleaninJ procedu...,,. for field equipnent is detailed in Section 2.6.2.
Water levels will be neasured with clean electronic tapes. 'Ihe tqJs of
casinJs will be surveyed in order to make a pteeise groun::lwater level
measurement.
2.6.2 Deocrrt:aminatim far Gramdwater Sanplin:J Fq1ipnent
Decontamination of groun::lwater samplinJ equipnent will be accatplished by
usinJ the followinJ pIOCEdure:
1. Wash with ?10SiiJate-free detergent arrl tap water as scxm as possible
after use usinJ a brush to rem:,ve any particulate matter or surface
film.
2. Rinse equipnent thoroughly with tap water.
3. Rinse equiµrent with 10% nitric acid solution.
4. Rinse equipnent thoroughly with tap water.
5. Rinse equipnent thoroughly with distilled water.
6. Allow equipnent to air dry.
7. Wrap equiprent canpletely with ali.nnirrum foil to prevent contamination
durinJ storage or transport to arrl fran the field arrl between
samplinJ locations.
Water rinseate fran the decontamination process will be contained in a 55
gallon drum arrl analyzed for waste dlaracteristics to detennine the
~ropriate method of disposal. 'Ihe final distilled water rinseate will
2-21 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I roP.2
I
be cx:intained separately am analyzed for TCL parareters to determine the
effectiveness of decontamination.
'Ihe electronic tape will be rinsed with distilled water after each use.
2.6.3 QC far Gralrdwater Sa:apJ inJ
'Ihe quality control for groumwater sanplinJ CXll'ISists of traceable
documentation of sanple collection activities, prqier field presezvation
techniques, arrl ~ of sanple han:llinJ effectiveness usinJ
ai:p:rq:,riate blank sanples.
Groon:iwater sanple collection activities will be traceable thrc,Jgh a
pernmient field log book l!'aintained by field ~nnel. 'Ihe field log
will include the infonnation given on the sanple label as well as the
sanplinJ equiprent used.
All groumwater sanples will be labeled at the ture of sanplinJ in
a=rdaooe with Section 2.1.
Field presezvation of groumwater sanples beinJ sent to the analytical
laboratocy will cx:111ply with the requirements given in Table 2.
Necessary presezvatives will be ackled arrl sanples will be cooled
i..Imoodi.ately after collection. Shii:pinJ cx:intainers will be prepared for
transportation to the lab in a=rdaooe with Section 3.3 Sanple Olstody.
Groon:iwater sanples will be placed in clean glass jars to be field
analyzed for pl, specific oorductarx::e arrl t:.eitp=lture. Field calibration
of analytical equiprent will be in a=rdaooe with Section 3.4.
2-22 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.7
'lhe sarrple hanllil'g effectiveness will be measured throogh the use of trip
and field blanks. A mininum of 10% of all groondwater sarrples sent to the
lab will be blanks. Final rin.seate fran equipnent deoontami.naticn will be
sanpled and analyzed for TCL parameters in order to detennine
deoontami.natian effectiveness.
W1ISIE 51\MPLilC ~
'1he µirpose of the waste sarrplil'g program is threefold; to characterize the waste
remainiig an Ma=n/Dx:kery site, to detennine the quantity of waste remainil'g on-
site, and to assess the awropriate disposal methods.
IOP.2
2.7.1 Iagrxr, 10 Sanplin] P.Iocro~
'1w soil boril'gs will be cxm:iucted throogh the cap on lagoon 10 (Figure
20). Shelby 'l\Jbe sarrples will be collected in a=rdance with Section
2. 3. 4, SUbsurface Soil Sanplil'g in oro.er to characterize the waste
remainiig in the lagoon and to define the vertical extent of the waste.
Decontamination and QC procedures will CCB11ply with Sections 2.3.5 and
2.3.6 of this docun-ent. In the event that J:X).ysical properties of the
waste remainil'g in lagoon 10 prohibit the use of Shelby 'l\Jbes, the "Sludge
Judge" will be used for sarrplil'g as described in Section 2. 4. 2, Pon:l
Sediment Sanplil'g Procedure.
2.7.2 TanJc Sanplil'g Pre •::ebrre
Materials in 10 tanks and 2 tankers, identified in Figure 21 and 22, were
removed duril'g the initial clean-up ~tian as described in the Work
Plan. Arrj remainil'g or aoamulated liquid or sludge in the tanks will be
sarrpled in a=rdance with Section 2.4.2 and the wastes will be
characterized for appropriate disposal. The general waste
characterization will incl\Xle the J:X).ysical property, Ji:!, flammability and
p~ of organic chloride. Chemical analysis will also incl\Xle TCL
parameters for organic volatiles.
2-23 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
~ EXIST. MONITORING WELL
• • WOODS LINE . .,
:::::=:::: ROAD
¼ ALL TANKS ARE
ABOVE GROUND.
c::JLAGOON II
e LAGOON 10
•
0
UNUSED
DIKED
LAGOONS
11 1 1 ~~~
50 l00 150 FEET ·
UPPER MACON r-----7
SITE ___ _. .
0
,:,0 I
r----8°o (I
1 00
I c
I
I
I
I I
tLOwe:R M;C(lN
SITE VICINITY MAP
LAGOON 10
..
a
SOIL BORINGS
LOWER MACON SITE
FIGURE 2·0
I LEGEND
-$2 EXIST. MONITORING WELL
WOODS LINE .~ -ROAD
DLAGOON I
"' 0
w 1-
:;)
0 a: I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e TANK SAMPL..-------
LOCATION . (}LAGOON 2 * ALL TANKS ARE
ABOVE GROUND. A-. -W-2
(/LAGOON3
w
J-<(
1-Cfl
LAGOON
6
~
AGOON
LAGOON 4
O
LA~ON
5 0 TANK 4
TANK 2
TANK
5
7
/1. TANK Bi
LAGOON U
TANK9O
LAGOON 9'0
UPPER MACON r---a-1
SITE 0 o I
I dJ. I
I oo 0 r-,----, I d
I I 0 I I
I 0 I L----
le
I I
I 0 I
~-l.DWER-M~N
SITE
VICINITY MAP
BLDG. I
BLDG.2
TANK 7 «a,
BLDG. 3
FARM
HOUSE
SCALE
TRUCK~
TANKER\)
2
I I I I I I
0 50 100 150 FEET
TANK SAMPLE LOCATIONS
fMAJNl UPPER MACON STTE C,soa:....:J
FIGURE 21
I LEGEND
~ EXIST. MONITORING WELL
I WOODS LINE
:::::=:::.-ROAD
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
e TANK SAMPLE
LOCATION
-f ALL TANKS ARE
. ABOVE GROUND.
~LAGOON II
LAGOON 10
UNUSED
DIKED
LAGOONS
SCALE
1111111
0 50 100 . 150 FEET
TANK SAMPLE LOCATION
LOWER MACON SITE
FIGURE 22
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
•
I
a
I
I
2.8
Tanlc saJ!Flil'g arxi waste di.sixisa1 will be urrlertaken by an EPA ai:proved
waste di sp::eal carpany.
SOIL GAS S1IMPIJ1C AND .IIN1illlSIS FKlGRAM
'!he Soil Gas survey will be ccniuct.ed in order to generally define the areal
extent of grrurnwater arxi soil contamination. '!he results of the survey will be
used to better locate IIOl'litoril'g -11s arxi soil boril'gs J::ut will oot overrule the
planned installation of -11s arxi boril'g described in the Maa:>!VDockery Site Work
Plan, Novem:ier 1988.
R>P.2
2.8.1 Soil Gas Sanplil'g P.t• u-dure
'!he basic premise of soil gas surveys is that if grrurrlwater is the soorce
of volatile organic cx:xnpoums (VOCs) arxi the above graun:l. atm:)5µ1ere acts
as a sink, a corw:::entration gradient will typically develqi between the
two. Soil gas vapor surveys are most effective when ma,::.pil'g low ITOlecular
weight halogenated organic sol vent chemicals arxi petroleum hydrocartxms
possessil'g high vapor pressures arxi low aqueoos solubilities. 'lhese
parameters allow voes to freely diffuse vertically arxi horizontally
through soil until they readl. the graun:l. surface arxi can dissipate into
the at:mr:J6Iii.ere. 'lhus, the presence of voes in shallow soil gas in:ticates
that the c:bseived cx:xnpoums may either be in the vadose zone near the soil
gas probe or in the groon:lwater beneath the probe. Soil gas corw:::entration
gradients may be locally distorted by hydrologic arxi geologic ananalies,
(e.g. perdled water, clays). However, the broader areal picture of
contaminant distrib.rt:ion is generally oot obscured by small scale
ananalies. Soil gas results, when interpreted with a koowledge of the
local geologic settirg arxi an urrlerst.arniig of controllil'g biodl.ernical
atterruation factors that affect a tai:get carp:mrl, can be effectively used
to con.struct a prelilninary map of the areal extent of grrurrlwater
contamination an::ljor soil contamination due to surface releases.
Dynamic grab saJ!Flil'g will be the method employed for obtainil'g soil gas
sarrples. 'Ihis methcxl involves sarrples beil'g collected fran a ITOVil'g
2-24 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I IOP.2
I
stream of soil gas that is pmped thra.¥111 a hollow prooe. 'lhe advantages
of grab sarrplin:J are that the number and plaoerent of prooes can be
optimized by utilizin] results fran previrusly sarrpled points as the
sarrples are analyzed illma:liately after oollectioo.
'lhe soil vapor prooes ccnsist of hollow 3/4 in::h by 2-1/2 foot lon:J
sections of hardened steel. A bolt-steel well point and slotted intake
screen are attad!ed to the leadirg en::l of one sarrple prooe.
Initially, the slotted intake and first sectioo of prooe will be
introduced into the subsurface usin:J a rotary hammer. Additionally prooe
sections will be added as necessary until the intake is at the awrcpriate
depth. For each area in wru.ch a soil gas smvey' is to be con::iuct:ed, the
initial two points will be sarrpled at three discrete depths. 'Ihis will
allow the optimum depth of sarrplin:J to be detennined.
Once the prooes are introduced into the subsurface, the surface portion of
the sarrplin:J train will be set up as illustrated on Figure 23. Usinj a
vao.rum µmp, a soil gas sarrple will be drawn cut of the prooes and into a
40 milliliter glass vial equiwecI with a Teflon lined septa and i;nenolic
cap.
Once adequate sarrples are obtained fran each pint, the prooes will be
withdrawn fran the subsurface usin:J a retrieval jack.
Intnediately after oollection each simple will be analyzed on Fhotovac
Model 10S50 portable gas chranatogrcq:n (GC), equiwed with a
i;nctoiatization detector, capillary oolumn and isothermtl oolumn Oll'en.
Target a:mpc:urrls will be chosen based at the results of soil and
gram:lwater analyses.
stan:lards for each target o:mp:,un:i will be prepared by dilutin:J the vapors
obtained fran the headspace above each pure o:mp:,un:i. 'lhe ano.mt of
headspare required to prepare a standard of kncMI coocentration will be
2-25 4262-1-1000
--

-

-

-
-------------------
TUBING
HOLLOW
STAINLESS STEEL
PROBES
( 3/4" 0 D. ) --
SLOTTED t
INTAKE AND It
WELL POINT-L '
VOA TRAP
AND SAMPLE
VIAL
FROM PROBES t __ j)
TEFLON LINED /
SEPTA~
PHENOL IC CAP
----
LUER T' >
~ HYPODERM,C NEEDLE
·t----40 · ml GI ISS
VOA VIAi.
SCHEMATIC OF
SOIL GAS SAMPLING
TRAIN
l-+--f---------t''--c,!<'--,,!"---71;;0;:;-N-.-,.-! -,,,._H:----+..,.,.,. "'soec----...-D-A_T_E--12---8-8-t
4£V DATE l)~SCRIPT10N F 3URE 23 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
··I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I roP.2
11
I
determined by usirg a table of stamard vapor pressures in =njurx::tion
with a koowledge of the prevailirg ant>ient air tenp>rnture.
Follo..rinJ warnup, instnmEnt blanks will be run until the GC baseline is
stable. 'lhe GC will be calibrated for the target oc:rrpc:,..rrds usirg freshly
prepared starrlards. After entry of the starrlards into the GC library,
sanple collection an.:i analysis will begin. Fach sanple will be manually
injected into the GC usirg an air-tight syrirge.
2.8.2 DoocEtaminatim of Soil Gas Sanplirg DJ1ipnent:
'lhe well point, slotted intake an.:i hollow prooe sections will be
decontaminated between use at each soil gas sanplirg point.
Decontamination will proceed as follows:
l. Manually scrape off soil adherirg to the CRitside of the well point,
slotted intake an.:i prooe sections.
2. Wash the interior (where applicable) an.:i exterior of each section of
the equiprent usirg tap water an.:i non-i;hosp1ate detergent.
3. 'lborooghly rinse with distilled water.
2.8.3 QC for Soil Gas SUrvey
'lhe quality c:xmtrol for the soil gas survey will =nsist of the followirg
procedures:
o Runnin;J of a column blank an.:i syrirge blank(s) bet..-een £Nery foor
sanples analyzed.
o 'lhe use of a dedicated VOA collection vial for each soil gas sanplirg
point.
o 'lhe prescreening of each soil gas sanple, usirg a piotoionization
2-26 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I roP.2
!I
detector, to detennine inject.iC11 volumes an:i prevent saturation of
the oolumn.
o DecontaminatiC11 of sanple oollect.iC11 equipnent as discussed in
SectiCl'l 2.8.2.
o Use of an isothermal oolumn oven to prevent baseline drift.
o 'lhe use of Ultra-zero air as a carrier gas for all analyses.
hi:litionally all pertinent informatiC11 pertaininJ to each sanple analyzed
will be recorded in a field notebook. At a min.inuim this information will
include the followirq:
o Sanple point identification number
o GC analysis number
o Sanple injection volume
o Analysis: time (in seoonds)
o Window used
o Minimum peak area for integration
o Slope sensitivity
0 Olart speed
o Target ocmp:micls detected
2-27 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
SEX:'I'.ICE 3. 0
DA'l2'. CX>lllX!l'ICE (PALl'lY
AS&llW«:E PIAN
3.1 Q!I.Wl.l!Cl:Lv.E::; l'ffi~CFMm
'lhe quality assurance d:Jjectives for all measurement data include considerations
for precision, accuracy, OC1Tpleteness, representativeness and catparability.
Parts of this section incorporate, by reference, U.S. EPA p.iblication, ~
Methods for Evaluating Solid Wastes (SW-846).
FOP.3
3.1.1 PJ:,ecisicn
Measurement data for this project will in::lude field data as well as
laboratory analytical data. 'lhe field measurement data in::lude pH,
specific corductanoe and temperature. 'lhe d:Jjective for precision of
field data ,oollection methods is to acru.eve and maintain the factory
equipnent specifications for the field equipnent. For the pH meter,
precision will be tested by multiple readin:Js in each media. Consecutive
readirgs shruld agree within ± 0.1 pH unit after the instnnnent has been
field calibrated with stardard buffers prior to use. '1he thentcmeter
factory specifications are precise to ± 1 'C. '1he the.nlaneter will be
visually inspected for ex>ltnnn separations prior to each use.
3.1.2 1\a::uracy
'1he d:Jjective for accuracy of field meab<llene1its is to acru.eve and
maintain fact:ory equipnent specifications for the field equipnent. 'lhe pH
meter is calibrated with buffer solutions traceable to NBS standards.
3.1.3 Representativecrness
5anples taken llllSt be representative of the pcpl].aticn. Where
ai:prqiriate, the pc:p.llation will be statistically characterized to express
the degree to wch the data accurately and precisely LEif'.-csent a
3-1 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
roP.3
characteristic of a pc:p.llation, parameter variations at a samplin;J point,
a process, or an envi.ranmental condition. 5an1?lin;J devices will be
cleaned bet\<leam samplin;J points to en.sure contamination does not enter the
sanple. To en.sure that the samplin;J equiprent has been sumessf,Jlly
decontaminate:i, a sanple of the final r.in.seate of deionized analyte-free
water will be =llected eadl day. Eadl day I s r.in.seate sanple will be
analyzed for the TCL parameters. Two other types of blanks will be
analyzed. 'lhe first type is a trip blank wdl will consist of a
volatile orgccic analysis vial filled by the laboratory with. deionized,
analyte-free water that will :rema:il'\ caEPf'Cl an:i accarpany the sample VOA
vials at all tines. A trip blank will accanpany all water VOA samples
shiwed to the laboratory. 'lhe trip blank inilcates the effects of sanple
bottle preparation an:i shiprent on sample inta;Jrity.
'lhe seoord type of blank is a wash blank. A wash blank is defined as
water poured into a sample =ntainer in the field, han:lled like a sample,
an:i transport.ed · to the laboratory for analysis. 'Ibis blank is used to
assess the · potential for =ntamination fran the final decontamination
rinse water an:i fran the water used for steam cleani1}3'. 'lherefore each
source of water used in final decontamination rinses an:i eadl source of
water used f<::,r steam cleanin:J will be tested by at least one wash blank.
'lhe wash blank will be analyzed for the <Xllltaminants of ~; i.e.,
TCL parameters. Both trip an:i wash blanks will be clearly mrked an:i
will not be used for matrix spike/matrix spike duplicate or sanple
duplicate analyses.
Field blanks are defined as uooontamiriate:i, analyte-free water poured into
sanple containers in the field, han:lled as 6cll1Ples an:i transported to the
laboratory for analysis. 'Ibis blank is used to assess the potential for
sanple contcmdnation durin;J shi~in;J to an analyses c:cnducted by the
laboratory. Field blanks will be analyzed for TCL parameters.
Finally, sanple selection an:i hardlin;J procedures will in:orporate
CXl!lSideratian of cbtainin;J the most representative sanple possible.
3-2 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
POP.3
Representativeness of specific sanples will be ac:.h.ieved by the foll=:in:J:
o Collect sanples fran that location which represents the sanpl:in:J
location cxnlitions.
o use awropriate sanpl:in:J procedures arrl equiµnent.
o use appropriate analytical methodologies for the parameters arrl
detectic:m limits required.
o Analyze within the awropriate hold:in;J time.
To assess the representativeness of the sanple collection procedures,
sane sanples will be collected in duplicate. One of the duplicates will
be given a "coded" or false sanple identifier, arrl both it arrl the
original sanple will be analyzed. Catparisons of the results fran the
original sample arrl its coded field duplicate will allCIIN for an evaluation
. of the representativeness of the sanpl:in:J. One coded field duplicate will
be collected for each 10 envirornnental sanples.
3.1.4 O:nparability
All data will be calculated arrl reported in units consistent with other
organizations report:in:J similar data. 'lhe objectives of this project for
oc:nparability are:
o to denDnstrate traceability of standards to NBS or EPA sources;
o to use standard methodology;
0 to tepOit data in. a fotmat that will allCIIN direct CXllpil"ison to
established envira1mentaljhealth criteria or regulatocy standards.
By us:in:J traceable standards arrl standard methods, the field analytical
results can be cnrpared to other stu:iles perfonned similarly.
3-3 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.1.5 Q:mpleteness
CCl!i>leteness is a measure of the information necessary for a valid
scientific study. 'lbe carpleteness of the data is the annmt of valid
data wtained fran the meaSutene.nt system versus the annmt of data
eJq:)E!Cted. fran the system. At the en:l of each sanplin;J event, an
assesSll'ent of the carpleteness of data will be perfonted and, if a:ey data
anissions are awarei,t, an attenpt will be made to resanple the parameter
in question, if feasible. 'lbe specific objective for carpleteness of
this project shall be greater than or equal to 90%.
3. 2 ~ ~ ASSURANCE
'!be sanplin::J program for the project oon.sists of representative sanplin::J of
grourrlwater fran the existin;J on-site wells and the newly constructed wells,
sanplin;J of surface water, sediment, soil, and soil vapor. 'lhe sanplin::J program
has been develq>ed to provide additional data necessary to identify if
grourrlwater, surface water, or soil contamination exists, and to detennine if any
imminent heal th hazard exists fran grourrlwater or other contaminated media. All
sanples will be han:lled in ao:x:,rdan::e with the Health and Safety Plan, this Data
Cbllection ~ity Assurance Plan and the Field Sanl)lin;J Plan.
In addition to the collection of the varirus media sanples, laboratory quality
control sanples, i.e., IIBtrix spiice and IIBtrix spike duplicate sanples, will also
be collected at the required frequency of one 11Btrix spike per 10 field sanples.
FOP.3
3.2.1 Bottle Preparaticn
It is inportant to use the prc:per sanple containers in order to minimize
the alteration of the groun:lwater chemistry between the field and the
laboratoJ:y. Sanl)le containers will be prepared by the laboratory. Prq,er
preservation will be perfonted, the jars labeled, and the dlain-of-aistody
fODIS enclosed in the shiR>in::J container prior to shil:Pin::J. Bottle types
ard preservatives are shcMn in Table 2 of the Field Sanl)lin;J Plan,
3-4 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I -
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IOP.3
repr.inbed fran SW--846. Methcxls of sarrple packagin;J am shil'.{Jin;J are
disa1ssed in Section 2.1 of the Field Sallplin;J Plan.
3.2.2 Methcxls of Sanplin;J
At a mininum, sarrplin;J prooedure standards will be in a=rdan::e with the
most recent USEPA guidelines and/or regulations. Iq:propriate arrl
aooeptable proce:iural tedmiques based on sarrple type an::i location will be
utilized when sudl USEPA guidelines and/or regulations are non-existent.
Specific methods for the collection of grc,.m:lwater, surface water,
sediment, soil, arrl soil vapor sarrples an, disa•ssed in the Field Sallplin;J
Plan.
3.2.3 lblitorin;J Well Sanplin;J
'Ihe saniplin;J of =ni.torin;J lrl'ells consists of three procedures: lrl'ell
purgin;J, lrl'ell sarrplin;J, an::i analytical field testin;J. In addition to
water sanples collected fran the =nitorin;J lrl'ells, three types of "blanks"
will be collected arrl subnitted to the chemical laboratory for analyses
as folla,is:
a. Trip Blank -A Trip Blank will be prepared before the sarrple bottles
are sent by the laboratory. It consists of a sarrple of distilled,
deionized water wdl aooatipanies the other sa111ple bottles into the
field arrl back to the laboratory. A trip blank will be irclu:ied for
eac::h day of sa111plin;J arrl analysis for '!CL parameters. 'Ihe Trip Blank
will be analyzed for '!CL parameters as a veasure of the internal
laboratory prooedures, bottle preparation :methoos, shil'.{Jin;J, an:l.
their effects on the results.
b. Wash Blank -'lb determine the effectiveness of the decontamination
procedures for sarrplin;J equipnent, a wash blank will be collected.
'lhis blank is a sarrple of distilled water wdl ha.c: passed +-lu:cu;Jh a
decontaminated bailer or other sarrplin;J ~tus. It is usually
3-5 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
3.3
collected as a last step in the decontamination procedure, prior to
dryirg equiprent. 'lbe wash blank will be analyzed for TCL
parconeters.. 'lbe source of the water tested will be noted in the
field log .book.
c. Field Blank -Field Blanks will be prepared to assess the potential
for sanple contamination durirg shiwirg to am analyses oorrlucted by
the laboratory. A field blank consists of uncontaminated, analyte-
frE!I~ water poured into a sanple container in the field, haniled as a
sanple am transported to the laboratory for analysis. Field blanks
will be analyzed for TCL parameters.
SAMPIECE'IOm'.
'lbe piog1a1u for sanple custody am sample transfer will be in catplianoe with the
llPSt recent USEPA Contract Laboratory Protocols am SW-846, as periodically
updated. To !'13duce the chance for error, the TIUlllber of personnel handlirg the
sanples will be minimized.
Personnel involved in the chain-of-custody (OX:) am transfer of sanq:,les will be
trained am bnoctrinated on the ax: puqx,se am prooedures prior to
inplementation. 'lbe log book will document the source of Reagents or SURJlies,
am in:licate the exact location am specifics of sanple collection · am sanple
preseivation.
'lbe sanq:>lirg package provided by the laboratory will arrive in the field sealed.
'lbe Site Manager will be responsible for receipt am iuspection of the sanplirg
package. Sanple containers am a c:hain-of-o.istody (OX:) rea:n:d will be inclu:1ed
in the sanplin;ir package.
Sanples will ]be collected in or collected am plaoed in sanple containers
provided by the• lab. 'lhe sanples will be preserved am sealed in aooordaroe with
laboratory instructions. 'lhe sanples will be labeled (Section 2.1.1) am placed
in the shiwin; container with water ice or ice packs. 'lhe ax: record will be
filled o.rt: by the field personnel am will duplicate the information pI'Cll'ided on
R>P.3 3-6 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the sanple labE~s. '1he ax:: recx:,rd will also include the number of sanples in the
shiwin;J container an:l the name of the person initiatin;J ax:: prcxiedures.
'1he shiwin;J o::int.ainer will be sealed by the field personnel an:l will remain in
their 0.IStody until 0.IStody is assumed by delivecy personnel or laboratory
personnel. On::e in the lab, the con:lition of shiwin;J container an:l sarrples will
be noted. If there is aey evidence of tanperin;J, the field investigation team
will be notiffod an:l the affected location will be resanpled.
laboratory in-hoose ax:: prcxiedures will be in effect once the sarrples arrive at
the laboratory. 'lhe laboratories' ax:: procedures are inclmed in the
laboratories' (lA(QC plans provided in Afperxiix A.
3.4 CALIHWL'Irn ~ 1!) (IRES AND ~
Instruments an:! equipnent used to gather, generate, or measure environmental data
will be calibrated with sufficient frequency an:l in such a manner that aocuracy
an:l reproducibility of results are consistent with the ~rcpriate manufacturer's
specifications or project-specific requirerrents.
calibration of field i.nstJ:unents will be performed at ~roved intervals eadl
specified by the manufacturer or trore frequently as con:litions dictate. Field
instruments will include J;ii meter, thennaneter, specific corr:hx:tan::e meter, an:l
}ilotovac TIP or HNU.
'lhe J;ii meter "'d.11 be calibrated with staroard l:Alffer solutions prior to a field
I trip. In the field, the meter will be calibrated daily before use with blo
I
I
I
I
I
I
l:Alffers. Fresh NBS traceable l:Alffer solution will be used for eadl field trip.
calibration prlXJEldures an:l frequency will be recx:,rded in a field log book, al0n3
with the log rnmi:lers of the l:Alffers.
'1he t:herllnDeter is calibrated by the manufacturer. '1he specific corr:hx:tan::e
meter will be calibrated in the field against krown NBS traceable stamards.
'lhe HNU or Rlotollac will be calibrated daily with a gas of knom ocn::entration.
IOP.3 3-7 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5 Dl\.TA REIIrnCN, VAI;Dll\TlCN, AND REE<lRl'.lk>
Field measure11ents will be made by geologists am en:Jineers, environmental
analysts, am tedlnicians. '1he foll(7;{~ stardard report~ wtlts will be used
dur~ all i;ilases of the project:
o pi will be reported to 0.1 stardard wtlts;
0
0
0
0
0
specific c:::omuctaooe will be reported to two significant figures bel= 100
micranhos per oentiireter (tmi1os/cn) am three above tmi1os/cn
terrperature will be reported to the nearest O. 5 • Celsius ( • C) ;
water Levels measured in wells will be reported to the nearest 0.01 foot;
soil sa:11pl~ depths will be reported to the nearest 0.5 foot;
elevati,on above National Geodetic Vertical Datum (NGVD) of 1929 (or other
established datum) of treasur~ points in monitor~ wells will be
surveye:i accurate to ± 0.02 foot.
'lhe elevation am location of existinJ am new wells shall be detennined by a
survey perforuied by a registered lam surveyor. All berdl marks use:i DBJSt be
traceable to a USGS survey narker.
Field data will be validated by the Project ~ity Assurarx::e Manager us~ foor
different prooedlm><;:
0 RaJtine dlecks will be made dur~ the prooess~ of data. An exanple is
lookin;J for errors in identification cxxies.
o Intemal cxn;isterx:y of a data set will be evaluated. '1his step will
involve plott~ the data am testing for ootl.iers.
:EOP.3 3-8 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0 0lE!Cks for =nsistency of the data set aver time will be perfonned. '!his
can be aaxl!plished by visually catl)arID:l' data sets against gross upper
limits •:ibtained fran historical data sets, or by t:estin;r for historical
consistency. Anc1tlaloos data will be identified.
o 0lE!Cks may be made for =nsistency with parallel data sets, that is, data
sets obtained presumably fran the same pc:p.llation (for exanple, fran the
same region of the aquifer or volume of soil) .
'!he pmp::,se of these validation cnecks am. tests is to identify ootliers; that
is, an abserrci.tion that does not confonn to the pattern established by other
observations. CXltliers may be the result of transcription errors or
instrumental breakdovms. CXltliers may also be manifestations of a greater
degree of spatial or tenparal variability than e>cpected.
After an ootlier has been identified, a decision concern.in;J its fate lllLISt be
remered. Ci::ivioos mistakes in data will be corrected when possible, am. the
correct value will be inserta:i. If a correct value cannot be obtained, the data
may be excluded. An attenpt will be made to ~lain the exister-=e of the
ootlier. If oo plausible ~lanation can be foon:l. for the ootlier it may be
excluded, but a note to that effect will be included in the report. Also, an
attenpt will tie made to detennine the effect of the ootlier when excluded fran
the data set.
3.6 FlEID QtJALI'lY a::N1roL uID.llS .AND ~
As a check an field samplin;J quality assuraroe am. quality control (WQC) , trip
blanks, field blanks, equipnent rinseate samples am. field duplicates will be
sent to the laboratory at specified frequen:::ies. 'llle frequerx::y with whidl these
samples will be taken, am. the rrumber of such samples, are diso•ssed in this
section. 'llle Project ~ity Assuran:le Manager will validate the analysis of
blanks.
IOP.3 3-9 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.6.1 Trip Blanks
A trip blank is defined as a sanple bottle filled by the laboratory with
analyte-i'ree laboratory reagent water, transported to the site, han:lled
like a Semple b.lt not opened, an:i returned to the laboratory for analysis.
One trip blank will be in::luded each day that sanples analyzed for
volatile organic cx:rrpcunds are sent to the laboratory.
3.6.2 Field Blanks
A field blank is defined as water poored into a sanple container at the
site, han:iled like a sanple, and transported to the laboratory for
analysis of the parameters of concern. Water used for field blanks shall
consist of uncontaminated analyte-free water poored into . clean, unuse::l
sanple oont.a:iners. 'lCL parameters will be analyzed.
3.6.3 ap,ip,e,t Rinseate Wash Blanks
F.quipnent rinseate sanples are defined as distilled water poored into or
p.lllFOO throogh the Sc111Flin:a' device, transferred to the sanple bottle, then
transported to the laboratory for analysis. F.qui~ rinseate Sc111Fles
will be taken each day that sanplin:J oocurs. 'lhe equiprent rinseate
sanples are to be analyzed for 'lCL parameters.
3.6.4 Split 5aDt>les
Split Simples may also be collected by the EPA an:i sul:lni.tted to another
laboratory for analysis. SUfficient advance notice of each sanplin:J event
will be given to the EPA to allCM preparation shalld split sanples be
desired.
3. 7 (IJALI'lY ASSURANCE ~ NJDl'lS AND SYSl}M; ADDrl'S
(;.\.lality assura.ooe a\Xiits are perforned by the project quality assurance group
urrler the dire::tion and awroval of the project quality assuraooe manager (iQAM).
FOP.3 3-10 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F\llrtionirg as an iroepement body an:i repo~ directly to caipany quality
assurarx:e man21gement, the FQ.?IM will plan, schedule, an:i awrove performance
audits based 1.1pon oaipany procedure rustanized to the project requirements.
system audits will be perfonra:l by the System QJality Assurance Auditor
iroepement of the project team. 'lhese audits may be jjipleirented to evaluate the
capability ard performance of project an:i subcontractor personnel, items,
activities, an:i documentation of the measurement systern(s). At times, the FQAr-1
may request additional personnel with specific expertise fran ocmpany amjor
project groups to assist in con:luctim performance audits. HOvlE!Ver, these
personnel will not have :responsibility for the project 1HOrk associated with the
perfornanoe audit. 'lhe specific personnel responsible for perfonnin;J QA audits
will be identified ·to EPA prior to canrreooernent of the field lo'Ork.
FOP.3
3.7.1 SystenAudits
System audits, perfonra:l by the System QJality Assurance Auditor, will
erx:x:srpa:ss evaluation of measurement system CXllpJl'lel'lts to ascertain their
awropriate selection am awlication. In addition, field am laboratory
quality control procedures an:i associated documentation may be system
audited. 'lhese audits may be perfonra:l oooe durim the perfonnanoe of the
project. Hc:Mever, if conditions adversely affectim data quality are
detected or if the project manager requests the System QJa].ity Assurance
Auditor to perform unscheduled audits, these activities will be
instituted.
3.7.2 Perfaz:nmx:ie Audits
'!he latlOratory shall be required to oorrluct an analysis of Performaooe
Evaluation sanples or provide proof that Perfonnanoe Evaluation sanples
sul:lnitted by EPA or a state agercy have been analyzed within the past six
JIIOllths. If the laboratory is IlQt a EPA Contract I.ab (CIP I.ab), the FQ,?IM
or designated auditor may ccniuct an audit after the laboratory has
initiated analysis of sanples fran the site.
3-11 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,1
I
l'OP.3
Also, cne field audit will be perfonned by the FQ1IM or designated auditor
durin;J collection of the field sanples to verify that field personnel are
follc:Mirg established sanplin;J prooedur'i!S.
3 • 7. 3 FormaJ i zed .Al.nits
Fomalized audits . refer to any system or perfonnanoe audit that is
documented arrl .i.nplemented by the QA group. 'Ihese audits encarq:iass
documented activities perfonned by qualified lead auditors to a written
prooedll= or checklists to d:ljectively verify that quality .assurance
requiren-ents have been develq>ed, doa.urented, arrl instituted in a=rdance
with ccntractual arrl project criteria. Fomalized audits may be perfonned
on project arrl subcontractor work at various lcx:ations.
Audit reports will be written by lead auditors after gatherin;J arrl
evaluatin;J all resultant data. Items, activities, arrl doa..mleTits
detennined by lead auditors to be in l'lOl'lCXl!pliaocie shall be identified at
exit interviews cxnructed with the involved management. Normupliances
will b~ logged, doa.urented, arrl controlled through audit fin:lin:Js which
are attached to arrl are a part of the integral audit report. 'Ihese audit
findi.n;;is forn-s are directed to management to satisfactorily resolve the
1XJ1m11pliaocie in a specified arrl tinely manner. All audit checklists,
audit i:eports, audit fin:lin:Js, arrl acceptable resolutions are awroved by
the ~ prior to issue. QA verification of acceptable resolutions will
be detE=ined. Upon verification acoeptanoe, the FQ1IM will close out the
audit report arrl fin:lin:Js.
It is the project manager's overall responsibility to ensure that all
corrective . actions 'lf!ClE'Ssary
prarq:,t.J.y arrl satisfactorily.
to resolve audit fin:lin:Js are acted upon
Audit reports llD.ISt be sul:lnitted to the EPA
site project coordinator within fifteen days of CC11pletion of the audit.
Serious deficieooies will be l:ep0rted to the EPA site project coordinator
as soon as possible follc:Min;J discovery of the deficieooy.
3-12 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.8 :mEVEN1'IVE ~ HO fl•~
Equipnent, instruments, tools, gauges, an::i other items requir~ preventive
maintenance will be serviced in aooortlanoe with the manufacturer's specified
xecumeudations.
Spare parts will be stored for availability an::i use in order to reduce the
dolmtime. In lieu of mainta~ an inventory of spare parts, a service
agree.rrent for rapid instnnrent repair or back-up instnnrents will be available.
3.9 Cl.lRRfX.:l'lv~ ACl'IOO
'Ihe follow~ procedures have been established to assure that oorditions adverse
to quality, sud! as malfunctions, deficiencies, deviations, an::i errors, are
prarptly investigated, doo.mented, evaluated, an::i corrected. When a significant
oordition adverse to quality is roted at regional, site, laboratory, or
subcontractor locations, the cause of the oordition will be determined an::i
corrective action taken to preclude repetition. Con:lition identification, cause,
reference doa.ments, an::i corrective action planned to be taken will be doo.mented
an::i reported to the site investigation team leaders, project managers, dlief
scientist, project QA manager, doo.ment control supervisors, an::i involved
subcontractor managenent, at a mininum. Serirus deficiencies will be reported to
the EPA Project OX>rdinator as soon as possible foll~ discovery of the
deficiency. lnq:>lementation of corrective action is verified by doo.mented
follow-up action. All project personnel have the :i:espo11sibility, as part of the
normal -work duties, to prarptly identify, solicit awrc,ved correction, an::i report
oorditions adverse to quality.
OJI:i:ative actions may be initiated when the follow~ situations occur:
0 When predetermined aooeptanoe starxiards are rot attained
0 When p:i:o:,edures or data catpiled are detennined deficient
o When equipnent or instnment is fourxl faulty
FOP.3 3-13 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I .
0 When sanples an:1 test results are questionably traceable
0 When quality assurance requirements have been violated
0 When designated ctEP:roval.S have been ci=ented
0 As a result of system an:1 performance audits
0 As a result of a management assessment
Project management an:1 staff, sudl as field investigation teams, reroodial
response pl~ personnel, an:1 laboratory groups, m:>nitor OfHJOirg work
performance in the no:aral coorse of daily tesponsibilities. Work is audited at
the regional offices, sites, laboratories, an:1 subcontractor locations by the
project ~ manager ard,lor designated lead auditors. Items, activities, or
doo.ments ascertained to be in roimuplianoe with quality assurance requirements
will be documented an:1 cx,rrective actions marrlated thrcugh audit findirg sheets
attadled to the audit report.
controlled by the IQAM.
Audit findirgs are lOCJJed, maintained, an:1
Tedmicians assigned quality assurance functions at the regional levels will also
control roimnplianoe cx,rrective actions by havirg the tespoJLs:ibility of issuirg
an:1 controllirg the ~riate Corrective Action Request Fenn. All project
personnel can identify a JlOJm,l(Jllarre; hoWeVer, the tedmician is respo11s:ible
for documentirg, J'lllltiJerirg, log;irg, an:1 verifyirg the closeoot action. It is
the project manager's respon.s:ibility to ensure that all recanmended cx,rrective
actions controlled at the regional level are produced, aocepted an:1 received in a
tinely manner. 'lhe project manager also awrc,ves all cx,rrective actions 1 ssile4
by the staff. An analysis will be made by the IQAM as to what effect the
deficient oarxlition has had on previCAJSly cx,llected, stored analyzed or reduced
data or sanples.
'lhe Corrective Action Request (CAR) identifies the adverse oarxlition, reference
docurnent(s), an:1 recanmended cx,rrective action(s) to be administered. 'lhe issued
IOP.3 3-14 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CAR is directed to the responsible manager in charge of the item or activity for
action. 'Ihe irxlividual to wnan the CAR is a<ih'essed returns the requested
response pruupUy to the tedmician in charge, affixin;J his signature an:i date to
the corrective action block, after statin;J the cause of the corxiltions arrl
corrective action to be taken. 'Ihe tedl!'lician maintains the log for status
control of CAR's responses, confinns the adeqllacy of the intended corrective
action, an:i verifies its .i.nplenentation. 'Ihe tedl!'lician will issue an:i
distr.iblte CAR's to specified personnel, incll.rlin;J the originator, responsible
project managerent, involved subcontractor, an:i the FQAM, at a mi.niJnum. CAR's
are transmitted to the project file for the.records.
3.10 (JlALl'lY ASSURl\NC:; REEU<IS
n.irin;J the = of the project, the FQllM will prepare one quality assurance
report which will discuss:
1) 'Ihe periodic assessrrent of ireasurenent data accuracy, precision an:i
catpleteness
2) Results of performance audits
3) Results of system audits
4) Significant Q.Jality Assurance proolerrs an:i action taken
I A final report prepared at the catpletion of the project will incl\Xie a separate
section SU11111arizin;J data quality infoI11Btion.
I
I
I
A report of the audits to be perfoI1119d will be sent to the EPA Project
Ox>rdinator following catpletion of the audit.
'Ihe status of the project will be reported on a periodic basis to the project
manager by the FQllM.
FOP.3 3-15 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Sfrl'IO{ 4.0
BFAillB AND S1IFEl.'Y PIAN
'Ihe folla..rin;J Health an:l Safety Plan (H&SP) was prepared by Olas. T. Main, Inc.
(MArn) an:l is site specific for the Olarles Maoon Dnlm an:i Lagoon Site an:l the
Dx:kecy Site. 'lhroughoo:t this Plan the b.o sites shall be ex>llectively referred
to as the Site. As per the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120 this H&SP shall apply
to all employers an:i employees en;)aged in hazardous substance response q:ierations
where employee ~ to hazardous wastes, substances, or any c:ambi11ation of
hazardous wastes an:i hazardous substaroes nay occur.
4.1 SITE I.DCATIW AND HISICRY
'Ille Cbarles Maex>n Dn.mt an::i Lagoon Site/Dx:kecy Site is approximately 17 acres in
size an:l is located on state Road 1103 in Richmarrl County, near Cordova, North
carolina. Mr. Olarles Maoon_q:ierated a waste oil reclamation facility which also
accepted paint an:l sol vent waste an:l waste acids an:l bases'. Operations at the
facility ceased in October of 1981 after the death of Mr. Maoon. A site
inspection oon::lucted by the North carolina Solid an:l Hazardous waste Division in
1980 revealed the Olarles Maex>n Dnlm an:l Lagoon Site to be a storage facility for
hazardous waste. storage at the site cxmsisted of 12 surface inpourdrrents
cxmtainin;J waste oil an:l sludge an:l CNer 2, ooo 55~lon drums oontainin;J
various chemical wastes.
Analyses of the oil an:l sludge in the lagoons revealed levels of lead, c:hramilD1l
an:l bari\.Dl\ to be in ewess of E.P. toxicity limits. Eight of the lagoons -were
\D'lli.ned an:l overfla..rin;J their bents. '!he ·· 55~1on drums contained hazardous
substances incluclirg methanol, toluene, vinyl thinners, epoxy, enamels, la~,
ethyl acetate, caustic soda, ethylene dtl.oride an:l sodi\.Dl\ hydroxide. 'Ihe Olarles
Maoon facility was not permitted un:ler ~ as a storer, transporter or disposer
of hazardous waste.
In November 1982, the executor of Mr. Macon's estate initiated clearrup activity
at the site in cxmplianoe with a cxmt order ct,tained by the North carolina Solid
an:l Hazardrus Waste Division. A total of 300 55-gallon drums -were rem:,ved an:i
FOP.4 4-1 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
two on-site monitorin;J wells were in.stalled before the JJDneY was expended. With
IX> other fun:ls available, the North carolina Department of .Human Resoorces
requested EPA's assi.stan:ie to CCl!illete the cleanup operation. In November 1983,
EPA began cleanup operations at the Site. When the cleanup operation erxied, all
of the drums had been re.roved arrl all wt ooe of the lagoons had been excavated
arrl backfilled. EPA records .in::ticate that the unexc:avated lagoon oontained
solidified creosote waste, solidified slu::)ge, 43 crushed enpty drum.s ard
I contaminated soil fran the cleanup operation. 'Ihis lagoon was backfilled ard
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
carr,ed "Tith approximately three feet of clay.
'lhe site was placed on the National Priorities List (NPL) in 1987.
4.2 FIEID~
'Ille duties of key personnel wno will be involved with site field operations
ardjor health arrl safety protocols, practices arrl decisions are given belCM.
FOP.4
Site Safety Officer
'Ille Site Safety Officer (SSO) will be the on-site representative wno will
be responsible for ll\i)lementin;J this (H&SP) • Responsibilities of the sso
will include, wt are mt limited to the follc:Min;J:
0
0
0
0
0
Assurance of safe working con:titions for all personnel on the Site.
Makin;! available suitable protective
seein;J that it is prq,erly used.··
equipnent to etployees ard
'
Properly mintainin;J monitorin;J tools arrl equipnent.
Ferformanoe of work in a safe manner.
Enforoerrent of the general an:i specific :rules an:i protocols set forth
in this H&SP.
4-2 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:EOP.4
o Imnediate steps to correct any ci:lserved violation of safety rules.
Additionally the SSO will have the authority to inmediately ~ any arrl
all activities on the Site that he/she considers to be unsafe.
'!he SSO will be at the Site whenever any field related activities (ie:
drillin;J, samplin;J, etc.) are bein;J oon:iucted.
4.2.2 Alternate Site Safety Officer
Should the SSO be unable to be present on the Site, the Project Safety
Officer (PSO) will appoint an alternate SSO on an as needed basis.
4.2.3 Site Manager
'!he Site Manager will also serve as the sso. Responsibilities of the
Site Manager will in:11.rle, rot are not limited to the follCMin;J:
0
0
Schedulin;J for all field related activities.
Assignment of personnel to jobs which they are capable of doin;J
safely.
4.2.4 Project Safety Officer
'!he PSO will have the follCMin;J Iesponsibilities:
0
0
Oiderin;J of protective gear, clothin;J arrl equipnent.
Making sure all personnel assigned to field asb.i.grnie,rt.s at the Site
have been piq:>erly trained.
o Mainta~ ne:lical arrl ~ records for personnel.
4-3 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.2.5 Misoe.1.laneaJs Perscrlnel
All personnel on the Site, for ~ OCl!illiarDe with this Plan is
necessary, will be un:ier the direct supervision of the SSO in all matters
c:xmc:emin::J health an::1 safety.
4. 3 Perscrlnel TrainmJ
All personnel to whan this H&SP is applicable as defined in Section 4. o, must ·
be trained in the followim subject areas in aexx>rdance with 29 CFR 1910.120
for the time (i.e 40 hours) specified by OOHA.
0
0
0
0
0
0
Name an::1 identification of person responsible for site safety an::1 health;
Safety an::1 health practices an::1 protocols an::1 the hazards present at the
Site;
Use of personal protective equipnent;
Work practices to minimize risks;
Safe use of en:i-ineerim controls an::1 equipnent on-site;
Medical surveillance requirelrents includin;J recoguition of signs an::1
synptans which might indicate an CNer exposure to hazards;
o . Site control measures;
0 Deo:>ntamination procedro:"PS;
0 Site standard qieratim prooedures;
0 Contingerx:y plan responses; an::1
o O::lnfined space entry prooedures.
J;OP.4 4-4 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
'
4.4
roP.4
4.3.1 Mliti.aw. T.raininJ
'!he sso am alternate sso will each have received an aalitional eight (8)
boors of specialized trainin;J in managin:J hazardo.ls waste site work.
Mlitionally the sso am alternate sso will also have received trainin:J in
first-aid am CPR.
srm .MY'fSS
4.4.1 lbint of Site D1tcy,1Erit
'!he main point of entcy/exit to the site will be the. point 'Where the
sa.rt:hem-nost acoess road to the site jurctions with state Road 1103.
'lhis point of entcy will be q,en at all times 1"hen field activities are
ooc:,.irrin:J. 'lhis is the point of entraroe to the Site that shall be shown
on all emergency maps am given verbally over the i:none to all emergency
resporoents who are sunm:med to the site. '!he main point of Site entry is
sha.m on Figure 24. All other site entrances fran state Road 1103 will
remain closed.
4.4.2 I.cg In/Olt Boak
Eadl person who enters the Site nust log in am oot. A log book will be
maintained in the site office. '!he log will shcM nanes, dates, times am
the p.upose of eadl visit.
4.4.3 Fil:e lanes
All acoess roads on the Site will be kept clear of parked vehicles am
other c:i:lstructions.
4-5 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEGEND
I, • n e • I --
EXIST MONITORING WELL
WOODS LINE
ROAD
DLAGOON I
e TANK SAr.f'L-------'
LOCATION LAGOON 2 -t ALL TANKS ARE
ABOVE GROUND. -$:
2
ZONE LAGOON 3 1---------
TANK 7
~
I LAGOON LAGOON 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6 -.--
LAGOON
AGOON so O ·, .. ,,
TANK 2
/1.. · TANK 8i
LAGOON 1U
TANK9~
LAGOON9g
BLDG.2
BLDG.3
UPPER MACON r---0-1
SITE otJ I
I (/J_ I
I oo 0 r----7 ' a I I 0 I I
I I 0
L-----IC)
I . I
I I
FARM
HOUSE
SCALE
TRUCK~
TANKER~ 2
r<)
0
uJ
I-::>
0
0::
uJ
I-<t I-
(/)
;:l
l-n:-$j (/)
0 :c
0 I-
~-LDWERM~
I
0 50 100 150 FEET
SITE
•• VICINITY MAP
___ MAIN. POINT OF
rMAJN~ SITE ENTRY /EXIT C,sa3......1
FIGURE 24
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.5 ~:,.ems
Work zones will be established based CB1 the findirgs of preliminary site
reconnaissance. At the Site, zones will be delineated 'lttlere different types of
qierations (i.e., drillirq arx:l sanplirq) will occur. At the Site, three
different zone designations will be used.
0
0
0
roP.4
Exclusicn Zale, the contaminated areas
Orltaminant :Redld.ial Zale (rnz), · the area where decontamination will
take place.
Sufp1tl Zale, uncontaminated area
4.5.1 Exci.usicn Zale
Exclusioo zones will be flag:;ed off usirq brightly oolored wateiproof
flag:;irq. Acx::ess to exclusion zones will be restrictro to personnel who
are p.rq:ierly trained. '1he level of personal protective clothin;J arx:l
eguipnent to be used in the exclusion zone will be the decision of the
sso.
Initial Site exclusion zones are shown CB1 Figures 25, 26, 27 arx:l 28. As
the results of preliminary groorxiwater arx:l soil analyses bem,e knc:Mn, the
perilreters of the zones will bem,e m:dified.
Entry/exit fran the exclusion zone will take place only at designated
areas al~ the zone perimeter.
4.5.2 Orltaminant Reducticn Zale
A CRZ will be flagged off for eadl exclusion zone. When at all possible
the contamination re:iuction oorridor, where the decxlntaminatian of
personnel arx:l eguipnent will actually take place, will be established
upwird of the exclusioo zone. '1he level of protectioo required in the
4-6 4262-1-1000
LEGEND -_::_=:_=:_-_----------,--,---~
EXIST MONITORING WELL / DLAGOON 1°'
WOODS LINE JJ
ROAD
I -$z
It t t t I
I --
I
I
I
I ,--~
I LAGOON.
6 ........ .,.. .....
I • 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8
BA
AGOON
LEGEND ( CONT. ) * · ALL TANKS ARE
ABOVE GROUND
♦·.NEW MONITORING WELL
--EXCLU.SION ZONE
SCALE
I I I I I I
0 50 · 100 150 FEET
\
\
\
\
BLDG.2
BLDG.3
,,,
g
IIJ
FARM
HOUSE
I-::,
0 a::
w
I-4 I-V>
RUCK
TANKER I cc::::::,
~
TRUC
ANl<E
2
~~
INITIAL EXCLUSION ZONE
lffER MACON SfTE
FIGURE 25
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-1
I
I
1-
1
LEGEND
~ EXIST, MONITORING WELL
WOODS LINE =Ro,>.[)
--EXCLUSION ZONE
~ NEW MONITORING WELL
4 ALL TANKS ARE
ABOVE GROUND,
\
\
\
\
\
II
'
UNUSED
DIKED
LAGOONS
SCALE
0 50 IOO 150 FEET
INITIAL -EXCWSION
ZONE FOR THE
LOWER MACON SITE
F'iGURE 26
I LEGEND
I '" " ' WOODS LINE
:::::: R:lA D
I -$-NEW MONITORING WELL
I --EXCLUSION ZONE.
I
I
I
I (_WOODS/
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I SCALE
I I I I I I I
0 ~ 100 150 FEET
I
I
~ ~ INITIAL EXCLUSION ZONE MAIN
.-UPPER DOCKERY SITE
F1G0RE 21
. LEGEND
I ,..,..,..,.,... WOODS LINE
I :::: ~AO .
• NEW MONITORING WELL
I -~-EXCWSION ZONE
17
,,;:_,...,...~r-..
LAGOON
~
X
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\ \
:1
I
\ ' I
I
SCALE
I ■ MM
I
0 50 100 150 FEET
INITIAL EXCLUSION
,,------, ZONE FOR THE -~~ LOWER DOCKERY. Sit£
FIGURE 28
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
·I
I
I
i I
I
I
Parameters
Volatile
Organic
~
Oxygen
a:mtent
Toluene
TABlE 3
Exclusion Zone Tasks
am Air M:>nitorirg Parameters
Drillirg am Well P\lrgirg
Well Installation am Sanplirg
X X
X
X
soil Gas
SUrveys Clearirg
X X
X
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.6
cm will be the decision of the s.so. Entry/exit fran the cm will only
take plaoe at designated areas alorg the cm perimeter.
Decontamination is diso1ssed in detailed in Section 4.9 of this H&SP.
4.5.3 siw11t ~
All areas of the Site not designated as either exclusion zones or cm will
be considered 5UPPOrt zones.
SI'IB SPEX.:I.FIC HAZAROO
'!he following list is a summary of chemicals ard metals that have been previously
detected in the soil, groondwater arrl/or surface water at the Site.
FOP.4
VOIATilE CR;I\NIC cnrn:xJNI:6
acetone
2--b.Itanone (a.k.a. methyl ethyl ketone)
1,1-dichloroethane
1,1-dichloroethene
dichlorodifluranethane
1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane
toluene
trichloroethylene
SEMIVOIATII.E CR;I\NIC cnrn:xJNI:6
bis(2-ethylhexyl)F,hthalate
3, 3-dichlord:lenzidine
PESTICimS AND FCB Is
gamna-m:c (a.k.a. hexachlorocyclooexane)
4,4'-00E (a.k.a. 2, 2-bis(p-c:hlorc:pienyl)-1,1-dichloroethylene)
Aroclor-1254 (a.k.a. polydll.orinated bii;tienyl 1254)
4-7 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Dl'.lq\NICS
baritnn
c:xbalt
du:anitnn
cq::per
lead
nickel
tin
vanadimn
zinc
cyanide
J\dditionally, creosote is lcnovm to be present in Lagoon. No. 10. Constituents,
thought be part of the creosote, have not been detected in any grt:A.JOOWater or
soil sanples at the Site. H<:Mever, for pnposes of health arrl safety, several
constituents of creososte (i.e. i;tieool, creosols, arrl pentac:hlorOEiieools) will be
taken into oonsideration 1rhlen establishin;J the levels of protective clot:hin:J arrl
equipnent required for field q:,erations.
When present in sufficient quantities, many of the dlemicals previoosly detected
in the soil arojor grt:A.JOOWater at the Site (or thought to be present at the Site)
will p:ise serioos threats to the health arrl safety of Site workers. ·'lb protect
personnel ~ have the potential for either deJJnal arojor respirato:cy exp::,sure
to dlemicals, levels of protective clot:hin:J arrl levels of respirato:cy protection
have been assigned for each field task to be conducted at the Site. levels of
protection ~ disc,issed in Section 4. 7.. Info:onation for many of the
aforaoontioned dlemicals arrl metals is given in Attadnnent No. 1 to this H&SP.
R>P.4
4.6.1 Air lt:nitaring and :Respirat.m:y Hazams
Amient air in the exclusion zone will be monitored for parameters wen
may p:ise threats to the health aro;or safety of personnel working in the
exclusion zone. '1he parameters to be monitored for will be depenient on
the task being perfonned in the exclusion zone. A sunmary of tasks arrl
the parameters for wch monitoring will be conducted is given in Table 3.
4-8 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.6.1.l Ma:dtarlnJ far Volatile Onjani.c 0:1lpcurx:ls
Levels of volatile organic ~ (VOC) in the alli:>ient air will be
measured usin;J a HNU lb:iel 101 Fhotoionization Detector with an 11. 7
ev lanp.
To convert Hnu readims to parts per million (~) the folla-1in;J
fo:arula will be used:
~ = ___ HNU=~Rea=dioo=·=---
Olemical Rlotosensitivity
'1be Hnu meter will be calibrated at the beginnin;J of each day it is
to be used. Calibration will be done with a mixture of 100 ~
isoo.ztylene in air. 'l11is mixture will give a Hnu reading of 67 @
span 5.0 with an 11. 7 ev lanp. Action levels for respiratory
protection fran voe' s are given in Section 4. 7.
4.6.1.2 Ma:dtarlnJ far Tol\ll2/M arrl Oxygen
Levels of toluene and oxygen will be measured usin;J a GasTech Model
GX-82 'Ihree Way Gas Alann.
'!he gas alann will be calibrated for toluene, as toluene has the
1C7<1e5t lower explosive limit (1.e.1.) for the oarblstible ~
Jan,m to be fll. sent oo Site. Action levels for toluene will be as
follows:
< 1. 0% by volume in air = Normal qieration.s
1. 0% or greater by volume in air = EvaOJate exclusioo zone
4-9 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
: I IOP.4
I
'lhe gas alann will be calibrated for oxygen by tmni.n;J it on in a
knc,,m fresh air environment. 'Ihis will give a reading of 21% oxygen.
'lhe oxygen zero will be adjusted by exposing the oxygen detector to
nitrogen. Action levels for oxygen will be as follows:
< 19. 5% = I.evel B Respiratocy Protection
19. 5 to 25% = I.evel D Respiratocy Protection
> 25% = Evacuate exclusion zone
'lhe gas alann will be calibrated for the ~ropriate oanpourrl(s)
(i.e. toluene andfor oxygen) at the beginning of each clay it is to be
used.
4.6.1.3 Respiratory 'Ihreats fran Seni.-volatiles and !JDl:ganics
semi-volatiles and inorganics will only present respiratory hazards
when inhaled as dust. 'lhus \fflene!Ver aey activities in the exclusion
zone will cause excessive ann.mts of dust to be swept into the
atJrosFbere, level C respiratocy protection will be worn by all
personnel in the exclusion zone, unless level B respiratocy
protection is required for other reasons.
4.6.2
As several carcinogenic oanpourrls have been previously detected on the
site and these oanpourrls may be absorbed ~ the skin, dermal
protection will be :required for several tasks to be con:iucte::l in the
exclusion zone.
thm a respirator is rm required to be worn, a hard hat with a protective
face shield will be worn by all personnel in the exclusion zone, when the
potential for splashing of water or dlemicals is pr sent. Acti= levels
for dermal protection fran dlemicals are given in Section 4.7.
4-10 4262-1-1000
I
I 4.7 H0I.fX.;11Cfi AND l!Cl'ICfi lEVE[S BY '!MK
I
I
I
I
I
I
Of the VOC's previa.isly detected at the Site, 1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane has the
la.>est permissible exposure limit (p. e. l. ) , see Table 4. Because of such a l<:M
p.e.l. all areas .mere drillirg, soil sanplirg or soil excavation will be
screened for 1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane usirg a portable GC.
Ad:iitionally, the GC will be calibrated for 1, 1-dichloroethane. lhis is the voe
with the next to the lc:,,,,,est p.e.l of the VOC's previously detected on the Site.
As no infonnation regardirg the ~itivity of 1, 1-dichloroethane is
available, Hnu readirgs can not be "translated" into z:pn for 1, 1-dichloroethane.
Results of the initial soil gas survey will be used to detennine the initial
levels of respiratory protection to be used durirg eac:n task (i.e. drillirg,
sanplirg) to be con:iucted at the Site.
I As several of the voes an::i other ~ previously detected at the Site may be
hazardous when aooorlled thro.tj:l or in cxmtact with skin, the level of protective
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
clothing for eac:n task has been detennined an::i is given, by task, bel<:M.
Information used to calo.llate action levels for the voes is given on Table 4.
roP.4
Task: Drillirg an::i Well Installation
q:,tion A
Soil Gas Results: 1-,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane detected
Initial Ievel of Protective Clothing: B
Initial Level of Respiratory Protec:ticri: B
4-11 4262-1-1000
r I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I·
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O...,p;,urxi
1,1-dichloroethane
1,1-dichloroethene
2-1::utanone
acetone
dichlorodifluratethane
'.17.BIE 4
SUIIU'nary of Volatile Organic
0::ttp:lUrd Olaracteristics
Used to Determine Action Levels
P.E.L. L.E.L.
100R=J11 6.0%
10 R=J11 7.3%
200J:P11 2.0%
250 J:P11 2.6%
U.E.L.
16.0%
16.0%
10.0%
12.8%
1000 R'.111 Not ccml:usti.ble
1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane 1 R'.111 Not canoost.ible
toluene 100 R=J11 1.3% 7.1%
trichloroethylene 25 R=J11 11.0% 41.0%
Notes:
P.s.
12.9
Unk
6.3
5.7
Unk
6.0
10
7.0
1. P.E.L.: '.Ihe lCMeI' of the permissible exposure limit or the 'Ihreshold
Limit Value. Refer to Attadllrent No. l for 110re infonnation.
2. L.E.L.: I.a.ler explosive limit in air, % by voll.llle.
3. U.E.L.: tJI:per explosive limit in air, % by voll.llle.
4. P.s.: Rlotosen.sitivity to an 11. 7 ev lallp.
5. Unk: Ul'lknC7,m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
I R)P.4
I
Option B
Soil Gas Results: 1,1,2,2-tetrac:hloroethane not detected
1, 1-dic:hloroethane detected
Initial Level of Protective Clothin]: c
Initial Level of Respiratory Protection: B
Option C
Soil Gas Results: 1,1,2,2-tetrac:hloroethane not detected
1, 1-dic:hloroethane not detecte:l ·
Initial Level of Protective Clothin]: C
Initial Level of Respiratory Protection: D
Action Level 1: ~ 25 ~ tric:hloroethylene
Response to Action Level 1: Level C respiratory protection
required.
Action Level 2: ~ 1000 ~ tric:hloroethylene
Response to Action Level 2: Level B respiratory protection
required.
Task: Monitoring Well Sampling arrl Purging
Option A
Soil Gas Results: 1,1,2,2-tetrac:hloroethane detected
Initial Level of Protective Clothin]: B ·
Initial Level of Respiratory Protection: B
Option B .
Soil Gas Results: 1,1,2,2-tetrac:hloroethane not detected
1, 1-dic:hloroethane detected
Initial Level of Protective Clothin]: c
Initial Level of Respiratory Protection: B
4-12 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FOP.4
Option C
Soil Gas Results: 1,1,2,2-tetradlloroethane not detected
1,1-didlloroethane not detected
Initial level of Protec:tive Clot:hin;J: C
Initial level of Respiratory Protection: D
Action level 1: 2: 25 i;:pn tridlloroethylene
Response to Action level 1: level c respiratory protection
required.
Action level 2: 2: 1000 i;:pn tridlloroethylene
Response to Action level 2: level B respiratory protection
required.
TASK: Clearing
Option A
Soil Gas Results: 1,1,2,2-tetradlloroethane detected
Initial Protective Clot:hin;J: B
Initial Respiratory Protection: B
Option B
Soil Gas Results: 1,1,2,2-tetradlloroethane not detected
1, 1-didlloroethane detected
Initial Protective Clot:hin;J: C
Initial Respiratory Protection: B
Option C
Soil Gas Results: 1,1,2,2-tetradlloroethane not detected
1,1-didlloroethane not detected
Initial Protective Clot:hin;J: D
Initial Respiratory Protection: D
Action Level 1: 2: 25 i;:pn tridlloroethylene
· Response to Action level 1: level C respiratory protection
required.
4-13 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.8
Action Level 2: ~ 1000 i:pn tric:hloroethylene
Response to Action Level 2: Level B respirato:ry protection
required and Level C protective clothirg required.
l'mSCHlEL HVIBCI'IVE CIOJHIH:i .AND JQJIIMffll'
'lbe clothirg and equiprent required for each level of personnel protection are
discussed below. All decisions to upgrade or ciowrYJr,lde levels of protective
cloth:in;r and equiprent will be made by the sso.
roP.4
4.8.1 Level. B Protective FqJipnent: and Cl.oth:in;J
0
0
0
0
0
0
Pressure-demand (positive pressure) self-contained breathin;J
cq::paratus (SCBA) • 'lbe SCBA nust be NICSJ1/MSHA approved and have a
full facepiece.
Olemical-resistant splash suit or polyooated disposable chemical
resistant ocveralls.
Olemical resistant hood (cptional, at discretion of SSO).
Inner and o..tter protective gloves (dlemi.cal resistant).
Olemical resistant safety boots.
Hard hat with face shield (cptional, at discretion of SSO).
All sleeve and leg ~ will be securely fastened to the o..tter gloves
and boots, respectively, us~ duct tape. Mimr rips and tears of the
protective cloth:in;J will be taped with duct tape as soon as they oocur.
ShCAJ.ld large rips or tears of the protective clothirg ocx:ur, the
protective cloth:in;J nust be rem::,ved in the~ and new protective clothin:J
duiue:l.
4-14 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
revel B protective equipnent arojor clot:hin3 will be donned in a=rclance
with the guidelines established in Section 4. 7 of this H&SP or at the
discretion of the sso, shalld reasonable cause for conoen1 exist.
Decontamination procedures for Ievel B are diso•ssed in Section 4.9 of
this H&SP.
4.8.2 Ievel C Protective Eqnipoent and Clot:hin3
0 Full face air-purifyin;J respirator with suitable cartridges.
0 Olemical resistant suit.
0 Inner and alter protective gloves (dlemical resistant).
o Olemical resistant safety boots.
0
0
Hard hat with face shield (optional, at discretion of SSO).
Emergency escape air 5tWly (optional except durin;J site
dlaracterization) •
All sleeve and leg q:ienin;Js will be securely fastened to the alter gloves
and boots, respectively, usin;J duct tape. Minor rips and tears of the
protective clot:hin3 will be taped aver with duct tape as soon as they
oocur. Shruld large rips or tears of the protective clot:hin3 oocur, the
protective clot:hin3 nust be relDll8d in the cm, and new protective
clot:hin3 donned.
Level C protective equipient and clot:hin3 . will be dauel in accordance
with the guidelines established in Section 4.7 of this H&SP or at the
discretion of the sso, shalld reasonable cause for conoen1 exist.
Decontamination procedures for Ievel C are diso•ssed in Section 4.9 of
this H&SP.
4-15 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.9
4.8.3 IeYel D P.totecti.VP E;pdpnent ard Cl.othmJ
o Coveralls.
0 Safety boots.
o Safety gog;Jles or safety glasses (optional, at discretion of SSO).
0 Gloves.
Mditionally, a full face a:ir-p.irifyin;J respirator m.tSt be carried by, or
kept within the inme:ilate area of operations, by ~ person enterin;J or
working in an exclusion zone.
tEXXNrAMINATirn
Decontamination measures for Level B, Level C ard emergency decontamination
measures are given belCM.
:K>P.4
4.9.1 PreYentiai. of o:ntam:inatiai.
In an effort to minimize cxmtact with waste ard thus lessen the potential
for contamination, the IXJints outlined belCM will be adhered to durin;J all
J;i1ase.s of field investigation ard sanplin;J.
0
0
0
Personnel will make every effort J!2t; to walk throogh puddles, mud,
any discolored surface and/or any area of cblrious contamination.
Personnel will ~ kneel or sit on the ~ in the exclusion zone
and/Or in the ~-
Personnel will ~ place equipient on c:lnm5 containers, vehicles or
on the unprotected grruoo.
4-16 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FOP.4
0
0
When at all possible, remote sanplin;J, handlin;J am =ntab,er q:ienirg
techniques will be enployed.
Where c!R'I'Opriate, personnel will -wear disposahlP. ruter gannents am
use disposable equipnent.
4.9.2 Decxnt.aminatia, Facilities
At the Site, decontamination facilities will be located in the CRZ, which
will be established between the Exclusion Zone am the SI.Ji:p:>rt Zone.
Level B Deoontamination
'lhe decontamination laycut for Level B protection is shc1wn on
Figure 29. 'lhe activities to be carried rut at each station
are described on Table 5.
Level C Decontamination
'1he decontamination laycut for Level C protection is shc1wn on
Figure 30. '1he activities to be carried rut at each station are
described on·Tahle 6.
4.9.3 Dle.tge,cy Decxnt.aminatia,
If :iJIU'nediate medical treatllent is required to save a life,
decontamination will be delayed until the victim is stabilized. If
decontamination can be perfonned without interferin;J with essential
life-savin;J techniques or first aid, or if a worker has been
=taminated with an extremely toxic or corrosive material that ooold
cause severe injury or loss of life, deoontamination must be
perfonned imnediately
If an errergerx::y due to heat-related illness develcp;, protective
clothin;J will be renoved fran the victim as soon as possible to
reduce heat stress.
4-17 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Figure 29
Decontamination Layout, Level B Protection.
Tank Change 9 ..,. __ _,
and Redress· Boot Cover/
0 uter Gloves ~
'Y
CONTAMINATION
REDUCTION
ZONE
EXCLUSION
ZONE
SuitiSafe,:y Boot
Wash
Suit/SC 3 A/Boot/G; eve
Rinse
Safety Soot
Removal
SCSA Backpack
Removal
Solash Suit
Removal
Inner Giove
Wash
Inner Glove
Rinse
Face Piece
Removal
Inner Glove
Removal
Inner Clothing
Removal
Segregated
Eouicment
Droo
---------+,---------CONTAMINATION CONTROL LINE -
Field
Wash 1---....r,s Redress
SUPPORT
ZONE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE 5: Measures for Level B Decontamination.
Station 1: s~•Jr~')ated Equipment
Drop
Station 2: Boot Cover and
GI ave Wash
Station 3: Boot Cover and
Glove Rinse
Station 4: Tape Removal
Station 5: Boot Cove!"
Removal
Sta t1 on 6: Outer G1 ave
removal
Station 7: Suit and Safety
Boot Wash
Station 8: Suit, SCSA, Boot,
and Glave Rinse
Station 9: Tank Change
Station 10: Safeey Boot
Removal
Station 11: SCBA Backpack
Removal
Station 12: Splash Suit
Removal
Station 13: Inner 61 ove Wash
Station 14: Inner Glove Rinse
"Station 15: Face Piece Removal
Station 16: Inner Glove
Removal
Station 17: Inner Clothing
Removal
Station 18: Field Wash
Station 19: Redress
1. Oe;rnsit l!quipment use1 an site (tools, sampling
de'lices anrl -:ontiliner-;, monitoring Instrument.:;,
r3dios, ~lipboards, e!c.) on plastic drop
cloths ~r in different container~ with plastic
1 iners. Se')r~gation at the dr!'lp reduces the
probability of cross•-:ontamination. During hot
weather operations, caaldawn stations may be set
up within this arP.a.
2. Scrub outer boot caver~ and gloves with decon
solution ,:ir detergent ~nd ~ater.
3. Rinse off decon solut~on from station 2 using
copious amounts of water.
4. Remove taoe around boots and gloves and deposit
in container with plastic liner.
5. Remove boot covers and deposit in container
with plastic liner.
6. Remove outer gloves and deposit in container
with plastic liner.
7. Wash chemical-resistant splash suit, SC3A,
gloves and safety boots. Scrub with long-handle
scrub brush and decon solution. Wr-ap SC3A
regulator (if belt mounted type) with plastic to
keep out water. Wash backpack assembly with
sponges or cloths.
8. Rinse off decon solution using copious amounts
of water.
9. If worker leaves exclusion zone to change air
tank, this Is the last step in the
decontamination procedure. Wor-ker's air tank 1s
exchanged, new outer gloves and boot covers
donned, and joints taped. Worker retur-ns to
duty.
10. Remove safeey boots and deposit In container
with plastic liner.
11. While still ..earing facepiece, remove back-
pack and place on tahle. Disconnect hose from
regulator valve.
12. With assistance of helper, remove splash suit.
Deposit In container with plastic liner.
13. Wash Inner gloves with decon solution.
14. Rinse inner gloves with water.
15. Remove face piece. Deposit In container with
plastic liner. Avoid touching face with fingers.
16. Remove Inner gloves and deposit In container
with liner.
17. Remove Inner clothing. Place in container with
liner. Do not wear inner clothing off-site
since there Is a possibility that small amounts
of contaminants might have been transferred In
removing the fully-encapsulating suit.
18. Shower if highly toxic, skin-corrosive or skin-
absorl>able materials are known or suspected to
be present. Wash hands and face if shower is not available.
19. Put on clean clothes.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Figure 30
Decontamination Layout, Level C Protection.
EXCLUSION
ZONE
Outer Glove Tape
Removal Removal
Canister or
Mask Change
and Redress -Boot Cover/
Outer Gloves
CONTAMINATION
REDUCTION
ZONE
Suit/Safery Boot
Wash
Suit/Safety Boot
Rinse
Safety Boot
Removal
Splash Suit
Removal
Inner Glove
Wash
Inner Glove
'Rinse
Face Piece
Removal
Inner Glove
Removal
Inner Clothing
· Boot Cover
&
Glove Wash Segregated
Equipment
Drop
-
__________ _.. __ R_•_m_o_v_a_l ______ CONTAMINATION
CONTROL LINE -
Field
Wash 1---..r,a Redress
SUPPORT
ZONE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE 6: MEASURES FOR LEVEL C DECONTAMHIATION
Station 1: Segrated Equipment
Drop
Station 2: Boot Cover and
G1 ave Wash
StJtion 3: Boot Cover and
Glave Rinse
Station 4: Tape Removal
Station 5: Boot Cover
Remova 1
Station 6: Outer Glove
Removal
Station 7: Suit •nd Boot
Wash
Station 8: Suit and Boot,
and G1 eve Rinse
Station 9: Canister or
Mask Change
Station 10: Safety Boot
Removal
Station 11: Splash Suit
Removal
Station 12: Inner Glove
Rinse
Station 13: Inner •Glave
Wash
Station 14: Face Piece
Removal
Statton 15: Inner Glave
Removal
Station 16: Inner Clothing
Removal
Statton 17: Field Wash
St~ti~~ 18: Red, ess
1. Deposit equipment used on site (tools. sampling
devices and containers, monitoring instruments.
radios. clipboar1s. etc.) on plastic drop
cloths or in different containers with plastic
1 iners. Se']re')ation at the drop reduces the
probability of crass contamination. During hot
weather operations, a cool down station may be
set up within this area.
2. S1.:rub outer" boot covers and gloves with decon
solution or detergent and water.
3. Rinse off de~~n solution from station 2 using
copious amounts of water.
4. Remove tape around boots and gloves and deposit
in container with plastic liner.
S. Remove boot covers and deposit in containers
with plastic liner.
6. Remove outer gloves and de~osit in container
with plastic liner.
7. Wash splash suit, gloves, and safety boots.
Scrub with long-handle scrub brush and decon
solution.
8. Rinse off decon solution using water. Repeat as
many times as necessary.
9. If worker leaves ~xclusion zone to change
canister (or mask), this ts the last step
in the decontamination procedure. Worker's
canister is exchanged, new outer gloves and boot
covers donned, and joints taped worker returns
to duty.
10. Remove safety boots and deposit tn container
with plastic liner.
11. With assistance of helper, remove splash
suit. Deposit in container with plastic liner.
12. Wash Inner gloves with decon solution.
13. Rinse Inner gloves with water.
14. Rema·,e face piece. Deposit tn container with
plastic liner, Avoid touching face with fingers,
15. Remove Inner gloves and deposit 1n lined
container.
16. Remove clothing soaked with perspiration and
place fn lined container. Do not wear inner
clothing off-site since there ts a possibility
that small amounts of contaminants might have
been transferred tn removing the fully-
encapsulating suit.
17. Shower ff highly toxic, skin-corrosive or skin-
absorbable materials are known or suspected to
be present. Wash hands and face if shower is
not available.
18. Put an clean clothes.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
steps for Level B an::l Level c decontamination are given on Tables 7
an::l 8 , respectively.
If decontamination cannot be done, the victim will be wrawoo in
blankets, plastic or rul:ber to reduce contamination of other
personnel. Emergency an::l offsite na:lical personnel will be alerted
to potential contamination an::l will be instructed aboot specific
decontamination procedures if necessary. Should the victim be
transported off the site, personnel familiar with the incident, the
Site, an::l decontamination procedure will accarpany the victim.
4.10 SI"IB STANmRD Omua'IJC PRXEXlRES (OOP'S)
POP.4
4.10.l Res{xli.sibility
A full-time designated sso will be on Site 'Whenever field q,erations are
coooucted. 'lhe SSO will administer this H&SP. '1he SSO will have the
authority to SIOf> any an::l all q,erations which he/she jooges to be UNSAFE.
4.10.2 llrl:ly system
No person shall enter any exclusion zone alone. Blrl:iles will be assigned
by the SSO each day before entry into the exclusion zone. 8.lddies must
remain within eye contact of each other at all times. '1he SSO must be
notified prior to entry into the exclusion zone by any person with a ruddy
other ti;ian the ruddy assigned at the begi.nn:in;J of each day.
4.10.3 lb:isekeepin:J
All areas within the ~ an::l suwcrt zone will be kept in a neat an::l
orderly coroition. waste cans will be errptied regularly an::l at the errl of
each day. '1he site office will be cleaned daily.
4-18 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE 7: MINIMUM MEASURES FOR LEVEL 8 DECONTAMINATION
Station 1: Equipment Drop
Sta ti on 2: Outer Gannent,
Boots, and Glaves
Wash and Rinse
Station 3: Outer Boot and
Glove Removal
Station 4: Tank Change
Station 5: Boot, Gloves
Station 6:
and Outer Gannent
Removal
SCBA Remova 1
Station 7: Field Wash
1. Deposit equipment used on-site (tools, sampling
devices and containers, monitoring instruments,
radios, clipboards, etc.) on plastic drop.
cloths. Sel)regation at the drop reduces .the
probability of cross contamination. During hot
weather operations, cool down station may be set
up within this area.
2. Scrub outer boats, outer gloves and chemical-
resistant splash suit with decon solution or
detergent water. Rinse off using copious
amounts of water.
J. Remove outer boots and gloves. Deposit in
container with plastic liner.
4. If worker leaves exclusive zone tc change air
tank, this Is the last step in the
decontamination procedure. Worker's air tank is
exchanged, new outer gloves and boot covers
donned, joints taped, and •orker returns to duty.
5. Boots, chemical-resistant splash suit, Inner
·gloves removed and deposited in separate
containers lined with plastic.
6. SCBA backpack and facepiece
touching face with finger.
on plastic sheets.
is removed. Avoid
SCBA deposited
7. Hands and face are thoroughly washed. Shower as
soon as possible.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE 8: MINIMUM MEASURES FOR LEVEL C DECONTAMINATION
Station 1: Equipment Drop
Station 2: Outer Gannent,
Boots. and Gloves
Wash and Rinse
Station 3: Outer Boot and
Glove Removal
Station 4: r.anister or
Mask Change
Station 5: Boot, Gloves
and Outer Gannent
Removal
Station 6: Face Piece
Removal
Station 7: Field Wash
1. 0Pposit equipment used on-site {tools, samp1ing
devices and containers, monitoring instrume~ts,
radios, clipboards, etc.) on plastic drop
cloths. Segregation at the drop rerluces th~
probability of cross contamination. During hot
weather operations, a cool down station may be
set up within this area.
2. Scrub outer boots, outer gloves and splai~
suit with decon solution or detergent water.
Rinse off using copious amounts of water.
3. Remove outer boots and gloves. Deposit in
container with plastic liner.
4. If worker leaves exclusive zone to change
canister (or mask), this is the last step in the
decontamination procedure. Worker 1 s canister 1s
exchanged, new outer gloves and boot covers
donned, joints taped, and worker returns to duty.
5. Boots, chemical-resistant splash suit, inner
gloves removed· and deposited fn separate
containers lined with plastic.
6. Facepiece is removed. Avoid touching face with
fingers, Facepiece deposited on plastic sheet.
7. Hands and face are thoroughly washed. Shower as
soon as possible.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
4.10.4 Acri.dents
All accidents will be illlmediately reported to the SSO. '!he SSO will fill
out a Accident Investigatioo,IReportin::J fonn an:l subnit it to the PSO
within 48 hoors. Any injury requirin::J treabnent beyon:l first aid must be
investigated an:l the Corporate Health an:l Safety Officer notified.
4.10.5 Safety Maet.in:J;
Safety meet:irgs will be held before project start-up an:l daily throughout
the duration of the project when field activities will occur.
4 .10. 5. 1 Initial Meetin::J
Before beginnin::J any field related tasks, all personnel involved with
the project will be briefed on required levels of personal protective
clothin::J an:l equipoont, methods of decontamination, use of
respirators, emergency procedures, location of safety equipnent,
contaminants present, an:l possible health effects.
4.10.5.2 nill.y Safety Maet.in:J;
At the start of eadl. -workday, a safety meetin::J will be held with all
personnel, who will be involved in field activities for the day. 'lhe
-work for the day will be outlined with the health risks an:l
~licable safety considerations di so1ssed for each task. 'lhe SSO
will "chair'' the meetirg. A record of the personnel attencl.in;J the
meetin::} an:l tq:>ics diso1ssed will be kept in the Site Safety log.
4-19 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.ll srm HE2UllH AND SAFElY Pil\N
All personnel will be provided with a CX11plete cq,y of this, the Site Specific
Health an:i Safety Plan for the MaCOIVDockery Site. All persons enteri.n:J the Site
an:i for wnan cx:xrplianoe with this H&SP is '100E'Ssary will sign a docu!rent stati.n:J
that they have read an:i urrlerstocxi this H&SP. Prior to signi.n:J, each person will
be asked by the SSO if they have any questions pertaining to this H&SP. F.ach
person will sign the document in the presence of the sso.
4.ll.1 Mcdificaticn of Health am Safety Plan
'lhis plan may be m:xlified only aft.er consultation with an:i approval from
both the sso an:i PSO. 1'ury m:xlifications to this Plan will be recorded in
the Site Safety I.cg. All persons wno had previoosly received a,pies of
this plan will be immediately notified, in writi.n:J, of any am all
m:xlifications an:i will sign a document stati.n:J they have received a cq,y
of the m:xlifications.
4.ll.2 ~ of Health am Safety Plan
'lhis plan, alorq with any m:xlifications, will be kept posted in the site
office at all tines.
I 4.12 srm s,u;my rm
I
I
I
I
I
I
A boun:i Site Safety I.cg will be maintained in the site office.
the log will contain the follciwirq informatiCB1:
o Personnel in atteroaooe at safety neetirqs.
0 Tcpics disoissed at safety meeti.n:Js.
At the mini.nDJrn,
0 DescriptiCB1 of any accidents or injuries an:i first aid remerea.
0
roP.4
a:mnents on the inspection of safety equipnent.
4-20 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o o:mnents on the calibration of safety equipient.
o Modifications to the Health an:l Safety Plan.
4.13 Clf-5rlE VEHICllS
With the exception of drill rigs, the ancillary trucks needei for drillin;J
operations, an:l emergency vehicles, I!Q other vehicles will be allCME!d to enter
the CRZ and/or the exclusion zone.
At least one car or truck will be present in the sui:port zone at all times when
personnel are present in the CRZ and/or the exclusion zone. Keys to the vehicle
will be readily accessible to all personnel in the case of an emergency. A nap
to the nearest hospital will be kept in the vehicle at all tin-es.
4.14 ~GRXM!Ri
Without fil'.Q"Pti.on, acy person wearin;J cx:mtact lenses will mt be allCME!d to enter I the CRZ and/or the exclusion zone.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Without exception, acy person with a bearded face and/or excessively lorg
siderurns will mt be allCME!d to enter the CRZ and/or the exclusion zone.
No person wearirg qiened-toed shoes, san:lals or shorts will be pennitte::i on the
Site.
4.15 <EAL ID'S AND ~•1:5
Eatirg, drinkirg, chewin;J gum or tobaexx>, snokirg or acy practice that increases
the prd:)ability of han:i-~ transfer an:l irgestion of on-site naterials is
prcrubited in .imY area designated as an exclusion zone or CRZ.
R>P.4 4-21 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.16 IHx.8 AND AIOH>L
Prescription drugs shruld n:it be taken by Site personnel 'Where the potential for
contact with toxic substaooes exists. Alccholic beverage intake is prdribited
durin;J the work day.
4 .17 CDn'LTANCE Wl'IH PIAN
All personnel at the Site must OC11PlY with established safety proce:rures. Arry
person 'Who does n:it OC11PlY with safety procedures as set forth in this H&SP an:l.
enforced by the SSO will be subject to immediate dismissal fran the Site.
4.1a ~ m•n•lHES
As there is a real an:l. present clan:Jer of emergency con:litions ocx:urrin;J durin;J
remedial Site investigations prior arranJements will be made with local
hospitals, emergency response organizations, an:l. fire an:l. police departments to
provide support upon notification.
IOP.4
4.18.1 Dnergency Signal
An emergeocy air horn will be located immediately rut.side the CRZ. When
. .
rapid egress fran the Site is required three short blasts will be soun:Ied
on the air horn. All personnel will exit the site the ll'OSt rapid way
possible via ESTABLISHED PA'IHS AND IU1I'ES. If time pennits,.
deaJn~tion will be perfonned before personnel exit the CRZ. If not,
personnel will exit the CRZ, then perfom decontamination. Personnel will
assemble immediately rut.side the site office and await further
instructions. A head ca.mt will be taken by the SSO. 'Ihe entry log will
be used to ensure that all personnel are pr sent.
4-22 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
roP.4
4.18.2 MEDIC7'L ~
None of the contaminants known to be pr: sen+: on the site are acutely
lethal. 'lberefore medical ~ies will take priority over all
deoontamination procedures. Action to be taken is the follow~:
o Notify sso immediately and oontact local medical authority.
o If victim has diffia.ilty breathing, loosen clothing an:i remove
respirator or deal with proolem as directed by local medical
authority.
o If victim can be safely m::llfed, remove the person to the CRZ. :Renove
personal protective equipnent. Renove protective clothing if it
does not cause delays, interfere with treatment or aggravate the
proolem. If ruter contaminated garments cannot be safely removed,
the imividual will be wrawe,:i in suitable material to help prevent
contamination. Normal deoontarnination prooedures should be foll~
\<.>hen at all possible.
o If victim cannot be m::llfed or if on-site personnel doobt that victim
can be safely m:,ved, sunm:in local reso.ie squad.
o Personnel will stan::i by inside the site office to direct the rescue
team to the injured person.
4 .18. 2. 1 Hospita]/IDcal Rlysi.cian
Hospital emergeocy roan personnel will be cxmtacted and briefed in
advance rEgarding the scq:,e of the stu:ly. A local piysician will be
identified for emergency referrals. 'lbe rcute to the hospital will
be mai:;p:!d and posted inside and rutside the field office, CRZ and on
the dashboard of all field vehicles. Travel time to the erergency
roan shoold be posted on the map.
4-23 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;I
I
I
I
FOP.4
Arrari::Jements will be 110.de with local aml::w.anoes, as well as
emergency, fire arrl police service to obtain pratpt response. 'lbe
list of emergency telepxme rn.nnbers will be posted arrl copies of
emergency I'Qltes arrl ~ rn.nnbers will be distrib.tted to each staff
menv:ier.
4.18.2.2 First Aid
'lbe SSO arrl the designated alternate SSO will be qualified to perfonn
first aid at the Site. First aid kits will be located in the CRZ
arrl in the support zone; a first aid kit will be carried by each
field crew. An eye wash station will be located in the support zone
arrl will be marked with p:raninent signs. In addition, an eye wash
kit will be carried with each field crew. Escape air packs (5-minute
air supply) will be carried in the field by each crew durin;J site
characterization.
4.18.3 Fire Elmrge!rq
'Ihe dan;Jer of fire is assumed to be significant durin;J all Site
qierations. D.Jrin;J subsurface investigation, both the photoionization
meter arrl the gas alann indicator will be used to 'IOCIJ'Utor levels of
potentially o:JllbJstible 110.terials in the a~. Fire extin;Juishers
(20-poun::l Class AOC) will be kept at each drillin;J rig or backhoe, in the
CRZ, arrl in the suwc>rt area. 'Ihe local fire deparbrent will be n:,tified
prior to begi.nnin;J any field investigations at the Site. If there is any
doobt that a fire can be quickly exti.rguished, all personnel will
inmediately exit the area arrl the emergen::y alann swrned.
4-24 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
roP.4
4.18.4 Explasi.als
Significant aca.mw.ations of canbustible gases at the site cx:w.d create
explosive at:mos{ileres. 'Iherefore, ex>ntinuoos air monitorirg will be
corxiucted durirg the tasks, and for the parameters, as diso2Ssed in
Section 4.6.1 of this H&SP.
4.18.5 Emrgency Tel~IE! NlmiJers
'Ihe followirg telepione numbers will be posted at the telepione in the
site office and a list of the numbers will be provided to each person at
the Site.
Ric:h!ron::l Melrorial Hospital: [phone]
Cordova Fire Deparbrent: [phone]
Roc:kiigham Fire Deparbrent: [phone]
Roc:kiigham Police Deparbrent: [phone]
I.ocal Ihysician:
Poison Control Center: 1-800-722-2222
U.S. Environmental Protection Agercj: [phone]; steve Norstadt
Clas. T. Main, Ire.: [phone]; Gary C. Ril:t>lett
Macon SUbo::rrtnittee: [phone]; Cl'lristq:iler A. Keele
4.18.6 Elietge,:cy Maps an::l Directims
4.18.6.1 Map an::l Di.recti.cns to D:Jspital
For norx::ritical medical emergencies, a map with detailed
instructia,s to the nearest hospital emergency roan is included
in this Plan as Figure 31. An altemate rcute and directions
are given oo Figure 32. 'Ibis map and instructions will be
posted in the site office and at other ~rcpriate locations.
4-25 4262-1-1000
/
HIGHWAY
r
\
N
•' \,,' ,.01..\_~
., ... -r-----i--~________:Hr---ll/ii1~fu;;:::=~ ,,, ! 0 ·c<>
~10'-'IP.'I' 1:--,~+--"'
0
' \ 0 :, ..,9 Leworae 1~,::: ";, 51 I ,'z ;-: ,-;:; __ _:,_"O f'._: cO~ r,;; g~ 8 ~ \/ Mid~ay 1~ 1 ~, t;,..t--71-----:/-.l__-',-t-------c,c,,..2:::C::;:.j.,__~L_::.~_::.::=::_ ___ L_ \\"'
ii
.. ,~-~ •---=-
:::~=~
Q
9,..... !,
-f''i;, ,10
/1/ Q~y; {9~,!, \' s,
R
g
,,/ ) ''2\"'"" ''. (, o" <s
\ '-!:';1
,~nfll) "-0 '
~. . ' ., ~
,..(p:J---Dz~ -----·--
eo i ..
L
2 -
3.
4.
5.
6. -
Directions to Richmond Memorial Hospital Phone Number: 997-2561
Address: 925 Long Drive
Rockingham, NC
Turn left out of site onto
Travel approximately 1 1/4
Turn right onto Hwy 1108.
Travel approximately 1 1/4
Hwy ll03.
miles.
miles.
Turn left onto Hwy 1
Travel approximately
(North).
3 miles.
Turn right onto Hwy 74
Travel approximately 2
(East)
miles.
Turn left onto Long Drive
Hospital is on right side
(Burger King on corn•
of road . --

-

-
---
....
;! -Ill, en
0 ::c ... 0 M I-
Ill Ill,
IC c:i:
:::, :E
C, Cl -I&, z
c:i:
en z
0 -I-CJ Ill
IC -Cl
/.·
---
/
0
;p
.,, .. :5' ~>
,..._,;.
< ·,
0
cl
/ \
HIGHWAY
~ '1 ["Y\:::·.· ....
-<
's_\ c; o .. ~~ S1
~ 1;,;'
' \
.'SPRJ-, .. ,l>C.-
,I
,, • i'~D~~•
/-,
I
1.
2.
3.
J61tl ·.
"'ot.'~
_I.E~'-·----
Alternate Directions to Richmond Memorial
Phone Number: 997-2561
Address: 925 Long Drive
Rockingham, NC
Hor;pital
Turn left out of Site onto
Travel approximately 1 1/4
Turn right onto Hwy 1108.
Travel approximately 1 1/4
Hwy 1103.
miles.
miles.
Turn left onto Hwy 1
Travel approximately
(North).
4 1/4 miles.
Turn right onto Long
Travel approximately
Drive (at
1 mile.
Tar Heel Motor --mrt). -
~-;,i,:v ~-
''4v :~
• I
I
-
N
M
11,1 a: ::::,
0 -u.
....
.! -A, ,n
0
%
0 ...
A,
4
:E
0 z
4
,n z
0 -...
CJ 11,1 a: -0
11,1 ;
z a:
11,1
!:i
4
--
D
D
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IOP.4
4.18.6.2 Map to Site Fran Fire DeparbDent
A map with directions fran the Cordova Fire Department to the
Site is given as Figure 33 this Plan. '!be map will be posted in
the site office alorg with written directions.
4.18.7 Site Evaalatic:n
JJepend.in;i on the cause an:i magnitude of the corxiltions requiring
evacuation, three stages have been designated:
o Withdraw fran :imnediate work area to a safe up,1ind location.
o Withdraw fran site.
o Evacuate nearby facilities.
4.18.7.1 Up,;'iro Witlm"awal
tJI:Mind withdrawal is required when any of the follC1;1ing corxiltions exist:
o Air quality corx::entrations contain exoessive corx::entrations of
volatile organic, ClCITlbJstible gases, toxic gases, or an oxygen
percentage above or belc:M safe levels for the level of protection
being worn. Field crew(s) will withdraw to a safe up.rind location
determined by the sso.
o A minor accident cxxurs. '!be victim will un::1ergo decontamination
procedures an:i be transported to a safe up.rind location. Field
operations will rea.mie after first aid amjor decontamination
procedures have been administered to the affected individual.
o Protective clothin;! amjor respirator malfunctions.
4-26 4262-1-1000
I
I
~74
/
.
-----1::::0 __
HIGHW.IH
Lt•aiae \~'!-?~ ---c-,'-.::.~
I. ~,_ ~",t
.~L--'-'+------'------'--1\"' ,1•' i \~
I'",
·:[J,,OCO SCL:frl
,,.~.,,ff<-"o
--I -
1.
s 2.
t 3.
4.
5.
l~~T ' -------
AHof.:11 ST
N000 0.R '
ROCKIN GHAi\I
Directions to Site
Address:
---:~.-~~":~~
•• --: L.Al(t:;
----.'~
, . ........,, .... "'"'"' .... ~ .,.,,_ ~
1,('!f!''-"~-"'-:::..., :} ..
•_J ., . .,c,,,.(;",:r~ c:,
_I :.._ ··,
"
Pop. 8,300
r·~rt/(\
1-·2s:f19
from the Rockingham Fire Department
231 South Lawrence Street
Rockingham, North Carolina
/2
Turn~ out of Fire House onto Lawrence Street and travel
to end of street.
At first crossroad, turn right onto Leek Street and travel
to the end of the street.
Turn left onto Hwy. 1 (South) and travel approximately 2 3/4
miles.
Turn right onto Hwy. 1108 (West) and travel west until the
highway ends.
Turn left onto Hwy. 1103 (South) and travel approximately 1
1/4 miles. The entrance to the Site will be on the right. ---------
I
:E
0 ... a:
II, z Ill Ill :E ... -a: ,,, 4
Ill A.
:c Ill ... Q
0 Ill
Cl) ... a:
Cl) -II,
Ill A. :E 4 a: :E 4 j :c c., Q c., -z II, z 4 -,,, ~
z (,)
0 0 -a: ... Ill (,) :i: Ill a: ... -Q
--
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.18.7.2 Withdrawal fran Site
Evacuate the Site if:
0
0
0
Explosive levels of canb.Jstible gases, toxic gases, or volatile
organic are recorded.
A major accident or injury cxx:urs.
Shock-sensitive, unstable, or explosive materials are discovered.
4.18.7.J EvaaJatiat of Nearl:ly Facilities
A continuous release of toxic, flammable, or explosive vapors fran the
Site cx:wd affect people off-site. Air quality will be m::mitored dCM'!Wind
to assess the situation. 'lhe Project Manager or hisjher on-site
designated alternate is responsible for detenninm::J if ci.rcumstaroes exist
for a:ey level of off-site contamination warrantirg conoern for people off-
site. He/she should always assurre worst case con:litians \mtil proven
otheI:wise. If con:litians are marginal, evacuation should be corrlucted
mrt:il acceptable comitians resume. 'lhe proper authorities will be
ootified should the evacuation of neamy facilities bea.tte TJeOeSsary.
4.19 MEDICAL ~
All personnel wearirg level c or level B protective clothirg will be m::mitored
for heat stress 'When the teiperature in the work area is above 10• (21 "C).
'lhe types, causes, synptans am treatirents for heat stress are given in
Atladment No. 2 to this H&SP.
FOP.4 4-27 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
I
g
I
I
4.20 CXflF'INED m mJRY HO E•JRF.S
'Ihere are DQ confined spaces on the Site that will be entered for aey field
related activities.
FOP.4 4-28 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ATTACHMENT NO. 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.I
I
I
I
I
Info:anation and References
for the following three (3)
Tables of Chanical Data
was taken directly frcm:
NIOSH POCKET GUIDE TO CHEMICAL HAZARDS
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES
Public Health Service
Centers for Disease Control
National Institute for Occupatlonal Safety and Health
September 1985
Fo, ••I• b)' th• Superlnlend1tnt of Doeument•. U.S. Qov•m•n•nl
'P1-lnlln1 Offh:e, WuMncton, o.c. 20402
' i !lil!II!
0 l
i i ,
l
~ ~ .;
:!h~!}
' ~~~ocw~~~-~~~~~o~o~~~~>~ ,
l!l!!il!
-----------------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
hbl~ J
nESPIRATOFI ~f)OINOTES,
CODE COMPONENTS, AND CODES !Contlnuodl
Coou
S,\CF
SCBA
SCB ..
sceu PO PP
. An, 1000''"" •" '""""'"' eo••"•" ,n o conotnuouo llow ~~-,-
'""' '"""''"" '" '"'""·'''" '''". ,.,, ~»• onO 00"''"" on I
"'"""'""''"'"" "'o,n,, oc,,,.,. "'"""'" mo10
•n, '"""""""" ••••"•10, ~,,n ■ ''O'" '"''"0 1aco0•1c, op.,,1,0
'", conunuouo •10,. "'""'"
••, "" con10,n0<! """"'"O '""•"'"' ... , ••o•CQ«III 0,c,o, ""' ""
""""'""" o,o.,n,n; '""""'"' ••, •••leon•••••1 0,,,1n1ng •PP"""' ••lh, lull 1,,coo,oco
An, ,.,, tonlO•nt<O o, .. rn<ng
'""'"'"' ""'" '"" '"°""'"" ■ad """'"'" ,n • o•n•u•• """''"" "'"'"" ""''"'""'"'""'moot
ABBREVl/11101/S Fon SYMPTOMS
OF EXPOSUrlE
t>'C ,,•c,no;on,c,ca<t1"";tn
"'" .,,,,..<
•••• c•••Or&I . .,,, '"""""""""
'"" '"'""" '""' """'"''"" <O"I .. OO"tu"C1•.,III
<<>"'1,o 00°<H•he"
'""'"'' ,r, ou'
~""•'•
'"""""'0" '""'""'""' •<u'" "Q"' ""•''' '""" "' '"""'' "Q"• ""'"""'•' "'""''"""'
,,.,.,,,,,,~
ct,; ~·•·"•"''"" ... , """"'
d,•,. "'"""'' 0,1 1"0l•d
~.,t g,.,u,Nso,
d'U . d"U'""' ,,.. ··"···"·"·'· d•• O<'u•<•
"' •r,,,
•r" •e•"·"'' ,011. . •••••••,um
.,., ""'''0"""' •" <"<II .,,,n•00•1' cnol•notlora,o
,urn •urno•" ,,, .. ,,, ,.,,.,.,,,, ..
rnc la<•eu•ot•on
1,~ . ··~···" 1,~,1 .. •,~·'""'"" P,o,o .. l•o•IO•"
"O .. ""O"'
;no gno•"Q
Cl• gnl<o>n""'"''
g•<!d ;,oO,n•" ~••u . ;1>ucom,
g1u Qhl<O,.
"''U "•lluc,oo<,oo1
"••d "•><"I><••
oc·ret,1' ••" ••·a"' 10,.
''"''""'''""'
"'O"CC\ . "'oneC•IO"'
'"'" ~,..,o ••uce<i• "'''""""'
""""'" ""O'""'' n.-co,•t
lobl• I
ABBREVIATIONS FOR SYMPTOMS
OF EXPOSURE tContlnue~J
r•• .... o•""' o■10 . ···· oo•ou.,•ont
o•••·· ······•••"••" ot•U.
O><o■•o.
,, ............. .
.... ,neorno••1t '"" nl mu,culo, """"': "'°'""" Ol O '""0 o,,n,,.m
""''""""" ""'' "'"'. ···"'""""''. ·••t0• .. "• O•" nou,11 ... o•''•""'" ""''•ti• ••••••O, ot"O•Ol10I r""' ... ·"""''";••• o••to. •Mto•Mb'o
o•o . . o•;.,,••••••on
.,. ......... ou,,,,,
r'"'" . ····"""'"' r""' .. """'"'""'" .. ., . .,,, ....... •"'""'"·""'
ou•"' ···""'"'"""'' """"' • ou,,. OOII••• '" ••'<" oni, occu• ot Olt♦"OOO ,,gula< onto,.,•h. CUI •'I• tilo<nollng ,.,., ono,.,ongt.to"
""'"'On
scoiom• . an •"• o• ,b,.n• o, dto•e.,od ,lolon •n
"" "1UII l,old
.. .... !0""'
Oltob<t'fl•I .. •~n"""""'' o! '"" ,,., '" wnoc• '"' '""'' uu do no\ mnt II ••• UOl•t• coin•
1ub• .,uMlt•nol
,~ul .......... Ing
,,..,1 . .., .. ,n,ng .... It<"•<"'•••
1'mo, ..... '""'•••Olu•t i,nd. 1,na,,n,,.
,,acno,onc . ''"•"••O•onc,.,u,
""""" , .. o,o••tt•et,~o ,.0!10 ...... , •• , ....... !•0"'"'""' .. ~.. . ..~,~
'"" .. ·""tu1&"0"
,,. "'" '''""' d"•u•honco ...... ········""' when. ······•"•"'•"O
hbl• S
CODES FOR F111ST AID 011111
"' '"•mmod.
f-'•~10,1 111ont1on.
s~,.,
DuOI oli ,01,0
"'"'""'··
..... ,,., '"'"""" to• "0S10,,. .
"o"•"·""'" ,rnmo~. ,o.,
1,~ """
Soon llu••
• 01omo111 .
. II II•" cno••l'cal C0fT'" •n CMUOI wllh ,n, o,n •mm•d'•I") •Uh
1hr ,,., """ IO•Q~ ,.,.oun" ol ,.,,.,, occ,.,onoll1 Ullmg 1•0
•o••• ood UOP"' hdl GO!
..... ,,01 "''"""•" •mm•d,.,.,, CO""'''•"'" ,Muld nol ~·
""'" •h•n wotO•no "''° 1h" ''""'"'' ""'" ,,.,..,.,,, ,r,,.,, ,,, ,, . .,,,,.1
'"'" "'~ ,, •• '"'"'"I"'"''-··" 1N· "" ••I!• '•"0< ""0""'" ~• ••te• ,no""""""' ""'"•"0 in' •~ m•nul"1, oceu,on,1t, 1,•1,00
11,, •owor ,no uoo., ••~• G" "''"•<>• ..... ,,,,,, ,.,,.,.~ ..... ,
Conu,1 '•"''' 1"<1uld no• b• "0'" ~"•" •O"•ng •1t'1 lh•O , .. ,,,,.c.,
i, 1,,,, oho••"<" C0'1'U '" '"""·' "'"'IM,,.,, o,o,.,otlr ~u" ISo ~~~~:.:z:,:;01~ •• ~~:~;;•,::;:~!',i
uce•• +,o, Gt1 '""""'°' "'"""•n " ~. J"eomlo~ contloun Con•
"" 1 .. ,, .. 1hOUld nol b• ""'"
•"•" .,., .. ng ,.,ih lh" <htmicol
1rtni,,ol,dth•m•ulcom•1ln '"""•' .... ,, t"• '"" duot" 011 '"'"''"'"'"'' '"" '"'" ""'" '"' contamooOl•d ,,,., •II" """· II
•"'' ch,.,.,,c., o• Hou••• ton11,n
,ng '"" '"'"''<•• P•""''"'° ,Mough ,.,, e•o1n,no o•o"'•"Y
,.,,,0 , 0 11,, c101n,ng •n~ ""'" I"• ,kin ,.,tn • .,,,, G" modlcol "'"""en ,n,m•~,_,.,,
"'"" ••• ..,,. •••• ,,, .. '" conto,,, •'I"'"• •••no• mou,~. ••oo ••• <•O~>u,. •mm•d,.,.., II P•O,I•
0,,. "" occu11•d. o•I "'•d•e•• ,•o.n1,on
11 •h•1 "'""'" ctlo..,,,ol 10"'" '" c•nll<I ••lh ·•• ,.,n, ""m•d
,.,.,, uu,., '"" '"" •11" ... ;, '"'"""" oP ,.,,.,. Cl•< .,,0,,11
"""1,on,mm,dlal•I, ""'" cnem,c" o< l>Qu'd• cont""'"9 ,.,,, ,n,,.,,0,, co•1.c1, '"' '""·
r,o""otl, '""" '"" conll"''""'d
'"" ···" ,o,o """ ...... ",~ .. "''"''"' o• "ou•d• ••""'""'0 "'" •"•"''"' 00,,,,.,. 1n,ou;" I'•• 0 10,n,no '"''"'1"'"'' ••"'""
'"" clol''•; ••d •••• '"' •"" o•l'• !NO onO •II"·" ••<,IOl'O" o•·•••" '"" ,.,,.,no. O" n,.1,c,o 01tMll•n
II t"•• hQUld CO•"''"'•' "'on;
concenltOLIOh1 •' '"'' C"':'"''' ,,00,3 00'"°' t• C~"''" -,1• tk•
'''"· ,n,~•1,0I"• """ t•, CO'
u-,n,,.d '"'" ,.,,. '''"""' o• ,,.,,,1., orno•tum o•odu<"• II ... 1,., ,,.,1,~1•. '"·" ""'"'"·
"'""""•o•Otnd•1l0t lllnl1
l,oulO """"''"' o• ,1,ong con• c,n1<1IIOn! ~• I"'' <"-""'°' 1
•1Po'1 ••"ti"" tn,ou;~ 100 ••~t~•no ,m,..,d,,1,+, ,,.,o,. '"'
clo1h<ng """ """ ,.,, '''" """ ...... " .. , "'"''" . ., .. ,.,,,., p1oduc1, "•udll, ,,.,,.~1,,
'"'" """ i"• "'" '""" •••o on1 ,..,.,. Ci•• modloO, alltnllon ,,.,,.,a,.,.,,
"·"'' cnorn•eOI """""' '" CO"l•CI .,,n lhe '"'"· .,..,.,,d•ll"r Plu•h '"• '""""''"'"~ '"" •"" •••n
on1 ••••'· II '"" '"""""' o•""'''"' '"•ou;o '"• 0101n,ng ,,.,,.,,1,,t01y ••"'••• t"• clotn•e; on1 f•ulh I"• I"'" ••I• ....... 11 hntaOon o•••,1t1 ,.,., .,1,n•ng,
;•• m,d,eOI '"""""" 11 '"'' cn•micoi com•• In con1>e• ~""th,'"'"· oromou, llu>h lho coeta..,,o■'od ,,,n """ 10•0 ••d
..,,., If <M, en,m•co• oo"<l•otn
lhtough ,,. Oloth,ng. 010"'""'
'""'"'" •h• cLO,hloO •nd ""'" '"" '"" """ . ., .. "''"'""""
hble 5
CODES FOR F111ST AID DATA (Continued)
Sooo •'•mo11,1
""'"'"'m•• "'0"'"
Soo,, •o•to p,o•n~u,
Wtl,t•tu,h
•,nmod.
W,to•Hu,h ""'"'""' .
Wt••••uh o,•ma11,.
F,ut1••<: ,oov.o •.
SWALLOW
.. ,a<cel """""" .,,,.,,,:1 "'Ilk, II NA ... ,,. ~o
YOUIT .••
NO va .. 1t ••
po,1i,11 ■llr< "Hhlng. g.,
m•alc•I """""" ",_,, 10110 ""'"'''" o, 11ou10, conl>le•eo Lhl1 e•,.,1c&1 <!l'"lt '" """'"" _,,,. , ... '""· 0'0"'Plly •U• lh. COOIOmlOOto,:I
"'" """ •••o '"" """' "" ,.,.,,a"•• ...... ,fl.,,..,.,,"a
QOI mo•lcal 01'••1••• IP l"IO
m~llon chon,,c■• con"'"'"• "'" 01 Mn '"'0f,.•OU1 Cl(,tft•no
,m,,.•a•oo•1, ""'" l"••lltc"a .,., •llh ••,;• omounlO o• ,.,,.,
10 """"" nu1.a,1m,o•eoi"
''""•" •mm•O•Ot••·
" '"'' ""''"'"" ....... '" Conlaol
, .. ,. ,,. ·""· "''"· "· '"" ~;::;■110 t•<n ,..,. 1000 Ond
I( 1h11 O••"''Co• CO"'"' In tO•l><I
"'lh lh• '"'"· ,.,,,,, •• , .... , •uh
'"• co"""''"""d "'" w,1n >O•• ""~ ....... 11 "'" ,.,,.m•c" """"""" •"'""0" it•• eloit•<no ''""''""'••• , • ..,,,,. "'" <to1h,ng. '"''" ,,,. '"'" "''" ....... . .. ., •. , o•• "''"'<" "'""""" p,no,011,
II'"" """"''CII com"'" co"'""
""'' "" '""· o,omp,<, ""'" "" ,oa11m,n""" '"'" '"''" ,010 '"" ..... , ... '"" ,,, . ..,,,., """"""' '""'•0" '"' 010•"'"0. 0,0,,,011,
•t"'O•O ·•· C'Olh<"Q lhd """
too '"" •••• •••P and "''°' o,, m,o,cai """""" p,omoi,,
II lhlt ooo,n,oa• <0'"f1 '" <O"'"CI
..,r'> lh• "'" '"'"''"""'' lluon , .. ••"""''"'"" , .. ~ .. ,. ,.,,,• II I••• '"••"C" P•"""'°' '"• ""'"'"; ,.,,.,,a,.,.,,,,.,, •• ,
lh• Clolh,ng •nd llu>h '"• '''"
""" "'"'· Gol "'•01c1P ■tlOOl•on P•~"lOII)
II lh>1 o••"'••ol con,., In conuet •"• 1•• "'"· """ lht con. 1,,,,, ..... ,,,n "''" ..... ,
o•omo1•, 11 ,~., c"•m•c•'
""'"'""' lh• clo1•,ng. ,m m,o,a,~,, tOTQ" '"• cloth•no '"" llu,n IM ,.,~ .,,n •■tO, ... ,.,,.11, 11 "'"""0" ~ .......
'"'' • .,n,n;. ;o, ,,,,dlcal °'"""O"
" '"" '"'"'''" OOmH '" co""" "•thlOoo,>n,lm"'OdlOIOl)"Uh
'"• <o"t0mlno11d •"" w11• •01" " .... ""'"""' ••• .,,.1.,
l't c10,n1ng. •"'m•o•01•I• ••"'•••
1•• tlOl"•"g 100 """ 1•0 '"" """"""·II 11mo1om1 oocv< 1110, "Hhlng, g,t m•d1<al Olltn .,."1mmoo .. ,..,
II 1,.,, <"'"'"'' oomn •o ccn1a<1 •llh l"o '""• p,o,,.Olly •n• 1•0 '""""''"""j "'" """ "'"''· ,, ••'• en.,..,c,1 o•nt1,01t1 ,,.,
,,o,n•no. p,omot1, '""'••• '"•
OIOl~•"Q ood """ lno "'" '"'"
""''· <I ,,.,1-,•on "'""" ,11,,
....... 0 g11 mod•<OI "'""''""
IP a o•••on 0,.., ... •• l>•g•
omoun" OP •"" cn,m1c&1, m••• lh• ••oo,.o r••••" ,~ hnh "' ot one, II o, .. 1nlng au >tooood.
o••l••m ••1<IIC1>1 tt•P•<allon soea IM •"•<IOd ~•""" .,,m '""" "" a., ,,.,11co, ,,,,,._ 1,on " '""" ...... ,o.,
11 • o•••on "'""'"'"I••;• ""'"""" ol ,n., cn,m•col, mo,• lho t>oo,ocl OOt,on tO l,nh •H 01 oneo Ol•ot m,.,u,., ,,.
U1Uo••• unn«•11a,.,
If , o•••on o,uthu In 11,g,
•m•""" •I th" c"•mlc■I, mo••
1h• """'"" 0<'10" 10 l•t,h ,1, 01 0,c, U ~"•l••oQ "" ,oopoed,
o,,,o,,. o•Hlc,ai '"'"""'""
w, •• ··"'"'"0 """"'""· o•or.,,, l•o•n,o ""''0""•' "''' '""" '"" ................. , .. "''"'""""~ ,oo·., o•,;•n •••o 11,. olloct•d o,.,on ,.o,m """ al
"" GOI med,cll ■tt•nUO" •1
•oo" o, PoH•b•o
Ht••• Ohom,oO, hUtH" •••IIO•ed . g,im,o,01•01ton1,oo,m""•a•a1tt1
II '"" llould eh,.,,,. •• ,,., o .. "
,,.otlc•od ,no tno ,,,.on••
con,c<cu,, I"'"'"~'""'' ;••• 1no
o•••on lo,;t •••"'"'°' ot "'"" 10 onutt ••• <'-"''••'· ao no, ""'""'to"'"•••• ot<1on ,omit Ciol m•dlot• ""ni>on Im m,d .. 1,,,. 111 m•lk Ls nol lmm•d 101,11 ,,,,latll•. ;••• 10, o.,,on wolo, • .,,Ind et ml" I
,i 1h0, ·~•m>eOI ho, """ ...... lo,.•d. do no\ Inoue, ,orn.,lng
Clol ,,,,dlCli 11\tnllo<' .n,,., ...... ,,.
s,,,,. "' l•ocac .. II lhl• cn,mlcll ...... , '""
LJSt MAil NI. rnni >PlllS
1,..,001.,J
w ..... '""''"" OOl•o'•v•n bu• . NO ~OMIT, .••
<0 .. ,1. l,nm•o•o,·•· gtl ...... .. 01,_nllon II "1•d•tOI a,10nuon 11
not lmm•d1>LOly .... ,, •••• ;•I
lho orr,etod "'""" •• ,omn by
ho,on; lno ""''"" touo• '"• bl,_ c< I~• lh•oOI ,..,. O l1ogo,
O< ;ht I•• O•••oo "'VO ol
looc .. n •"•"•~ •" ••• o•:• 1;, 1h11 non p,.,,,10110" dtug
,noulO ••••ct""" •"'"9•"•• mecllooi '""""" In I~• "'"'' e• ■o• ond •• ,,.,lobl• 01 "'0 .. d•u; •l•t0• Ot ooun1t•1 Oo nol
,..,,, tn U"ton,clou, ""'"" . ..., ..
II I~•• chon,lc,I h" b•on 1n,,1,o
,.,,.., lo eono,c, •llh '"' «In.
o, "" b .. n •••''•--•O. ,.,m,~ ,, .. ,, ,: .. ,""'" '"''' """"" ~·••Cl•O on•"•••:••;•
" '"'' ,.,,,,.,., "" b"" '"""
,, .. ,1 ood '"" ""'°" 1, con "••u•."'""""'"'110''''°' ro••O" lo,;, ouo•tlll•• o• ••ltr
IC ~•lul• 1•, •"•"'•C•I Do 001 ,1r,..,p110 ..,,,, 1•0 o,,,en
,0..,,1 G,1 m,c,c,, """''"" • .,..,,11 ... ,,
It,.,,·"'"""''"" ... ", ....
'O· ea '"" ,. , "'", • ,. .o0 " ~· -,~-~ ... , ..... , ..... :••••• •••o• ~••"t"'"' 01 • ., •• .i,.,, ........... ~·····" lo••d. ,,.. to g■I 1'• ••••on 10
YO'T"I bl • .,;"~ lh• •• ,,on louch 100 b•<• or ,c,1, th•eal
,..,n o Plngo, Qo no, "''" on ""ton,c•ou, o,•,on ,o,,.•I. Ci"
'">O<llCII ott,nUon 1"'"'•11>1t<,
l!lh"•••"'• .. •N•b•on,w•• lo,.•1. •"'"'•d,01,1, gol ,.,,dlcal ,11tntlon 111'• ,,..,,,,.,d
c~•m'cOI "" dl.,••••1 In, 0'1•o•,u"' bn,1 m•"""• ~O POI mo•• ,,,.,.e,.d "'""" ,om•! IP m•e·cll 11tont1on ,, no! Im
'"•d1ao,•, ••••l•b•• '"1 '"' ,,.0,,0,.,acs,.,,.c,t • ., •
M,o~f'0'*"'" I ,.,lo, bn•
;oi1"•ot•!oa•o•"'"''b1h••
•n~ '"' otr,oo tout~ 1•1 ooc• ol
l"O" l•tOOI •'I" o ""~" o• ;"t tt• •"'"" lo•g• omoun" ,ono
•"' o• mo•<1 oP "'"" "" """ 11wo ••0101poon, ol ,at1 o•• olnl
ol "'"" Do not"''""' un• con1c1ou1 ••"on ,om<\
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
•
.. i~ ~i an
' 1ili
E~ • i~s~
g;''ijj
I
J
0
J
j
j rl i~ " ' s ~ ' ~~ -0
I rl .~ ' • ~! s 0 ~; s j,! ' 0 t"' :::
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I e
0
.
ii]J
it,;0 UUU>
!t~-~
~-~g~
J
l
. " i:tgii :is~ zo..,◄e
~-;'~.~i ~~ E ~ti D~ ,,
_!!ow.i::-; g~ uu..:i;~c, •o ""
~~ •• .:!~8
•
~
~-
~:t:
,i
.hUJ
~rh n .. s. Uh "'"""
! • !J
s11 ii '5.; 8ts
. z
r al! ••i• ~i-1. Lh .,.,:,.,
i id
&! Si a
:ii !§ ,o
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
• e ;;c5:;.
/1:~:::o
~,
!~\1} g 1'5 E £::h
"'!!~ "i 5 ~ .. i
~H! H~~
. ,
·,. l~ =t~ 8-, •• oS i~~
1"1l •a! ii~ !'" '" ~.:l~
• • J
! ,.
;_ , ! 0
' i ~ ~
i:~H
fl ,,
'a
i!wl if¥ Iii~ rg ... ,,.,.,
' ;
,,'g~
;Hi i ~ i ~fh& H&g
HH! H~§
' J iH
" ~ ii ..
f xHl :ri\ l :rB:
~ 2!:: St~ ~~
-~--J! :$.-a ~.;g
l";l
! a : ,! ..
hl H ill ,H'
:t ' 8I ,. I • !~-~i • :p.
~ ·~· ~-ag
\,> 0:; ·• "' s !& • z.,_ z .... o
l,
C: !• ~-.. z ~ !"!.!" ,. J :;!! r= ifL_ •• ,. ~ iitis <111''-'=
i .l ;; I I H 1 .. E bi .! ! ! • • I~
~ .. ; ,. • ej;! ':'-~
! ., " ~~U•:c Illes:
~ • ~ ~ ~~ ':' E -.:., , ,,.; ii:.., '• > ,, .. •• • ~5 -·~ li X. IL_,tj ., .2"'.a;;;. > . oo ~-•! ! 5,::-:-~~e ':'-.,t:.> J _:1:ou -~,. Cl E ne:;;; i~;~~ h;~~ ~. -..: .,,.,
u :;\g;~;;: ~ ~~~it~
e !ig ' ' l,t J ]i ;g 'l!
i~ iH s; i!' ;i ~~ .. l;,.. Si! H !~-0 !H pi .H i!
:i': ' ~ !:!! ' • •• ~ ~ -'
i; ; 1i PH 11 i~JI\ !I £5 t
~ .. .. o E!,. 1.., .u -~--.. ii.:2-cs-E
' id i e 5~~
!. {•' ~" 1 .,
" .itOi d f """ . 5!~
t~g~~ • ... I ii zv-.,c E ~t~:::i -~ , I E etl oc a q • iii • , X .. owz3 • ] <l ] q 0"':i:~O ' :~ , • , ~ • u 0 • " ~.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Abbreviations and Infonnation
for the Following Chemicals
was taken from:
Dangerous
Properties of
Industrial Materials
Sixth Edition
N. IRVING SAX
Assisted by:
Benjamin Feiner/Joseph J. Fitzgerald/Thomas J. Haley/Elizabeth K. Weisburger
lnmil VAN NOSTRAND REINHOLD COMPANY ~ NEW VORK CINCINNATI TORONTO LONDON MELBOURNE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
I
0
ale-alcohol
ALR-allcrgenic effects
AQTX-Aquatic Toxicity
asn-Aspergillus nidulans
BCM-blood clotting mechanism effects
bes-Bacillus subtilis
BLD-blood effects
bmr-bone marrow
BPR-blood pressure effects
brd-bird (domestic or lab)
bwd-wild bird species
C--con tin uous
CARC-carcinogenic effects
cc-cubic centimeter
chd-<:hild
ckn..chickcn
CL-ceiling concentration
CNS-central nervous system effects
compds-compounds
crys-crystal
CUM-cumulative effects
CVS-cardiovascular effects
cyt-cytogenetic analysis
D-<lay
dck-duck
DDP--drug dependence effects
dee-decomposes
DEF-definition
dlt-dominant lethal test
dmg-Drosophila mclanogastcr
dnd-DNA damage
dnr-DNA repair
<Ins-unscheduled DNA synthesis
dam-domestic
DOT-Department of Transportation
dpo-Drosophila pscudo-obscura
em~bryo
EPA-Environmental Protection Agency
esc-Eschcrichia coli
ET A-equivocal tumorigcnic agent
eye-administration into eye (irritant)
EYE-eye effects (systemic)
fbr-fibroblast
frg-frog
g. gm-gram
GIT-gastrointestinal tract effects
GLN-glandular effects
gpg-guinca pig
grb-gCTbil
H, hr-hour
ham-hamster
hla-HcLa cell
hma-host-mediatcd assay
hmn-hurruin .
I-intermittent
ial-intraaural
KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS
IARC-Intcrnational Agency for Research on Cancer
iat-intraancrial
ic;c.intraccrcbral
icv-intraccrvical
idr-intradennal
idu-intraduodenal
ih1-inhalation
imm-immcrsion
imp-implant
ims-intramuscular
inf-infant
ipc-intraplacental
ipl-intrapleural
ipr-intraperitoneal
!RDS-primary initation dose
im-intrarcnal
IRR-irritant effects (systemic)
isp-intraspinal
itr-intratracheal
ivg-intravaginal
ivn-intravenous
kg-kilogram (one thousand grams)
k.lp-Klcbsiclla pncumoniae
L-liter
LC50.1ethal concentration 50 percent kill
LCLo--lowcst published lethal concentration
LD50-lcthal dose 50 percent kill
LDL.o-lowest published lethal dose
!cu-leukocyte
lei-low explosive limit
ucl-upper explosive limit
Ing-lung
lvr-livcr
lym-lymphocytc
M-minutc(s)
M3, m3-cubic mctcr(s)
mam-mammal (species unspecified)
mem-mcmbranc
u, µ.-micron
mg-milligram (one thousandth of a gram; 10-3 gram)
misc-miscible
mky-monkcy
ml-milliliter
MLD-mild irritation effects
mm-millimeters
mma-microsomal mutagcnicity assay
MMl-mucous membrane effects
mmo--mutation in microorganisms
mmol-millimole
mmr-mammary gland
mnt-micronucleus test
MOD-moderate irritation effects
mol-mole
mppcf-million panicles per cubic foot
mrc-gene conversion and mitotic recombination
msc-mutation in somatic mammalian cells
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
M SK-musculo-skdctal effects
MTDS-mutation do~e
MTH-mouth dfet:ts
mul-multiple routes
mumcm-mucous membrane
mus-mouse
M UT -mutagen
NEO-neoplastic effects
ng-na.nogram (om:: billionth of a gram;l0-9 gram)
nmol-nanomole
nsc-Neurospora crassa
nse-non-standard exposure
NTP-National Toxicology Program
OBS-obsolete
ocu-ocular
. open-open irritation te::;t
orl-oral
OSHA-Occupational Safety and Health Administration
otr-oncogenic transfonnation
ovr-ovary
par-parenteral
pg-picogram (one trillionth of a gram;l0-12 gram)
pgn-pigcon
Pk.-pcak concentration
pmol-picomolc
PNS-pcriphcral nervous system effects
ppb-pans per billion (v/v)
pph-parts per hundred (v /v) (percent)
ppm-parts per million (v/v)
ppt•parts per trillion (v/v)
preg-prcgnant
PSY-psychotropic effects
PUL-pulmonary system effects
qal-quail
RBC-rcd blood cell effects
rbt-rabbit
rec-rectal
REGS-standards and regulations
ms-rinsed with water
S, sec.-second(s)
sat-Salmonella typhimurium
see-sister i.:hromatid t:xchange
SCP-Standards Completion Program
scu-subc.:utaneous
SEY-severe irritiltion effects
skn-administration onto skin
SKN-skin effects (systemic)
sl-slightly
sin-sex chromosome loss and nondisjunction
slh,p.:cifa: locus test
smc-Saccharomyces cerevi~iae
sol-soluble
spm-sp~rm morphology
spent-spontaneous
sq I-squirrel
srm-Serratia marcescens
ssp-Schizosaccha~omyces pombe
SYS-systemic effects
TC-toxic concentration
TCLo-lowest published toxic concentration
TD-toxic dose
TDLo-lowcst published toxic dose
!ER-teratogenic effects
TFX-toxic effects
THR-T oxic hazard review
TLV-Thrcshold Limit Value
tad-toad
tax-toxic, toxicity
trk-turkey
tm-heritable translocation test
TWA-time weighted average
TXDS-toxic dose
µg, ug-microgram (one millionth of a gram; 10-6 gram)
umol-micromolc
U, unk-unrcported. unknown
UNS-toxic effects unspecified in source
W-wcck
WBC-white blood cell effects
wmn-woman
Y-ycar
%-percent
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B
2,2-BIS(p-CHLOROPHENYLl-1,1·
DICHLOROETHYLENE
CAS RN: 72559
mf: C .. H,Cl,; mw: 3 l 8.02
SYNS:
I , 1 • DICHLOR0-2,2 -8 IS( P-CH LORO·
PHENYL)ETHYLENE
P,P' •OICHLOROOIPHE!'IYL 01·
CHLOROETHYLENE
TOXICITY DATA:
cyt-ra1:01h 10 ug/L
3
msc-mus: lym 40 mg/L/4H
orl-mus TDLo=9700 mg/kg/78W-
C,CAR
NIOSH #: KV 9450000
l, l '•DICHLOROETHE!'IYLIDENE)
815(4-cHLOROBESZE!'-IE)
l'ICJ-c00555
CODEN:
34LXAP -,555,76
MUREAV 59,61,79
NCITR• NCI-CG-TR-
131,78
orl-mus TD,28 gm/kg/80W-C,NEO
orl-mus TD' 17 gm/kg/78W-C'CAR
JNCIAM 52,883,74
NCITR • NCI-CG-TR-
131,79
orl-rat LD50'880 mg/kg TXAPA9 14,515,69
orl-mus LDLo'200 mg/kg lPETAB 88,400,46
Toxicology Review: RREVAH 48,141,73. NCI Carcino-
genesis Bioassay Completed; Results Positive: Mouse
(NCITR• NCI-CG-TR-131,79). NCI Carcinogenesis
Bioassay Completed; Results Negative: Rat (NCITR •
NCI-CG-TR-131,78).
THR: An cxper CARC, NEO. MOD or!. MUT data.
Disaster Hazard: When heated to decomp it emits very
tox fumes of c1-.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
n
I
BIS(~-ETHYLHEXYL)PHTHALATE
CAS RN: 117817
mf: C2,H380,; mw: 390.62
SYNS:
81S(2-ETH YLHEXYL)-1,2-BE!'I·
ZENEDICARBOXYLATE
01(2-ETHYLHEXYL)oRTHO·
PHTHALATE
01(2-ETHYLHEXYL)PHTHALATE
Dl·SEC-OCn'L PHTHALATE
NIOSH :;:;:: TI 0350000
DOP
2-ETHYLHEXYL PHTHALATE
NCI-C52733
OCTOIL
TL V: Air: 5 mg/m3 DTLVS• 4, 159,80. Toxicology Re-
view: EVHPAZ (3),73,73; RREVAH 54,1,75;
JOCMA 7 15(10),808,73; CMIVAS 10(3),49,73;
ESKHA5 93,1,75; TXAPA9 45,1,78. OSHA Standard:
Air: TWA 5 mg/m3 (SCP-D) FEREAC 39,23540,74.
NTP Carcinogenesis Bioassay Completed as of Decem-
ber I 980. "NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods"
Vol I S40. Reported in EPA TSCA Inventory, 1980.
EPA TSCA 8(a) Preliminary Assessment Information
Proposed Rule FERREAC 45, 13646,80.
THR: An exper TER, GIT (man). Possible hmn CARC.
HIGH ivn; LOW orl, ipr, unk, skn; MLD skn, eye
irr.
Disaster Hazard: When heated to decamp it emits acrid
smoke.
For further information see Di-(2-Ethylhexyl)Pbthalate,
Vol. I, No. 7 and Vol. 2, No. 2 of DPIM Report.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B
I
I
n
1,1-DICHLOROETHYLENE
CAS RN: 75354 NlOSH #: KV 9275000
mf: C2H2Cl2; mw: 96.94
Colorless volatile liquid. bp: 31.6°, lei= 7.3%, uel =
16.0%, fp: -122°, flash p: 0°F (OC), d: 1.213 @ 20°/
4°, autoign. temp.: 1058°F.
SYNS:
CHLORURE OE VINYLIOE."'lE
(FRENCH)
1, l•DICHLOROETHENE
1-1-DCE
NCJ-C54262
VJNYLIDE!'IE DICHLORIDE
TL V: Air: 10 ppm DTL vs• 4,432,80. Toxicology Review:
CTOXAO 8,633,75; CMTVAS 10(3),49,73; NTIS••
ORNL/f!RC-77/3. Occupational Exposure to Vinyl
Halides recm std: Air: TWA l ppm; CL S ppm/ISM
NTIS••. NTP Carcinogenesis Bioassay Completed as
of December 1980. "NIOSH Manual of Analytical
Methods" VOL 4 266°. NIOSH Current Intelligence
Bulletin 28, 1978. Reported in EPA TSCA Inventory,
1980. EPA TSCA 8(a) Preliminary Assessment Infor-
mation Proposed Rule FERREAC 45,13646,80.
THR: An exper MUT, ETA, NEO, CARC. HIGH acute
orl, ihl. See also vinyl chloride.
Fire Hazard: Highly dangerous, when exposed to heat
or flame.
Explosion Hazard: Mod, in the form of gas, when ex-
posed to heat or tlame. Also can explode spontaneously;
reacts violently· with chlorosulfonic acid, HNO,,
oleum.
Disaster Hazard: Highly dangerous; see chlorides; can
react vigorously with oxidizing materials.
To Fighr Fire: Alcohol foam, CO2, dry chemical.
lncomp: Air; chlorotri-fluoroethylene; ozone; perchloryl
fluoride.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (AROCLOR
1254)
CAS RN: 11097691 NIOSH :/;:: TQ 1360000
Composed of 11 % tetra-, 49% penta-, 34% hexa-and
6% hepiachlorobiphenyls !FCTXAV 12,63,74)
SYNS:
AROCHLOR \ 254
AROCLOR 1254
CLOR0D1FENILI, CLORO 54%
(ITALIAt-1)
CHLORIERTE B1PHE:,.IYLE, CHLOil·
GEHALT 54% (GERMAN)
CHLOROOIPHE!'-4YL (54% Cl)
DIPHE:,IYLE CHLORE, 54% DE
CHLORE (FRE~CH)
NCl<02664
TOXICITY DAT A: 3
orl-rat TDLo: 188 mg/kg iMGNJ
od-rat TDLo:645 mg/kg (MGN)
orl-rat TDLo=90 mg/kg ('7-150 preg)
orl-rbt TDLo:350 mg/kg (1-280 preg)
orl-rat TDLo:4 gm/kg/2Y-t=ETA
orl-mus TD lo: 17 gm/kg/
48W-C:NEO
skn-mus TDLo=4 mgfkg:ETA
orl-rat LOSO: 1295 mg/kg
ivn-rat LD50:J58 mg/kg
ipr-mus LD50=2840 mg/kg
CODEN:
FCTXAV 12.63.74
FCTXAV 12.63.74
FCTXAV 11,471,73
EVPHBl 1,67,71
NCITR• NCI-CG-TR-
38,78
JNCIAM 53,547,74
BECT A6 18,l52,77
FCTXAV 12,63,74
FCTXAV 12,63,74
BECTA6 8,245,72
Carcinogenic Determination: Human Suspected !ARC••
18,43,78.
TL V.· Air: 0.5 mg/m3 DTLVS• 4,89,80. Toxicology Re-
view: EVHPAZ 1,105,72; ARVPAX 14,139,74;
RREVAH 44,1,73; STEVA8 2(4),305,74; BISNAS
20,958,70. OSHA Standard: Air: TWA 500 ug/m3
(skin) (SCP-I) FEREAC 39,23540,74. Occupational
Exposure to Polychlorinated Biphenyls rccm std: Air:
TWA 1.0 ug/m3 NTis••. NCI Carcinogenesis Bioas-
say Completed; Results Indefinite: Rat (NCITR • NCJ-
CG-TR-38, 78). "NIOSH Manual of Analytical Meth: -
ods" Vol. 2 S\21.
THR: An cxper ET A, NEO. A susp hmn CARC. HIGH. -
ivn; MOD orl, ipr. Sec also PCB's.
Disaster Hazard: When heated to dccomp it emits _tox
fumes of c1-.
For further information sec Chlorinated Diphenyls, Vol
1, No. 3 of DPIM Report.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
VANADIUM
CAS RN: 744062:!
af: V; aw: 50.94
NIOSH :;;:: YW 1355000
A bright white, soft ductile metal; slightly radioactive;
bp: 3000°; d: 6.11 @ 18.7°; mp: 1917°. lnsol in water.
TOXICITY DATA: 3 CODEN:
ims•rat TD Lo: 340 mg/kg/43W-l NCtuS• PH 43-64·
TFX•ETA 886.SEPT.71
TL V· Air: 0.05 mg/m3 DTLVS' 4,425,80. Occupational
Exposure to Vanadium recm std: Air: TWA 1.0 mg(V)/
m3 NTIS". "NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods'
VOL 3 S391, VOL 5 173::;:,290::;:. Reported in EPA
TSCA Inventory, 1980.
THR: An exper ETA. See also vanadium compounds.
Fire Hazard: MOD in dust form from heat or flame.
sparks.
Disaster Hazard: Violent reaction with BrF,, Cl,, Li. oxi-
dants.
VANADIUM COMPOUNDS
THR: Variable. Vanadium compounds act chie!ly as irr
to the conjunctivae and respiratory tract. Prolonged
exposures may lead to pulmonary involvement. -There
is still some controversy as to the effects of indusrrial
exposure on other systems of the body. Respons.:s :ire
acute, never chronic.
The first report of vanadium poisoning in hmns de-
scribed rather widespread systemic effects, consisting
of polycythemia, followed by red blood cell destruction
and anemia, loss of appetite, pallor and emaciation,
albuminuria and hematuria, gastrointestinal disorders,
nervous complaints and cough, sometimes severe
enough to cause hemoptysis. More recent reports de-
scribe symptoms which, for the most part, are restricted
to the conjunctivae and respiratory system, no evidence
being found of disturbances of the gastrointestinal tract,
kidneys, blood or CNS. Though certain workers believe
that it is only the pcntoxide which is harmful, other
investigators have found that patronite dust (chiefly
vanadium sulfide) is quite tox to animals, causing acute
pulmonary edema. The fumes arc highly tox.
Symptoms and signs of poisoning are pallor, green-
ish-black discoloration of the tongue, paroxsymal
cough, conjunctivitis, dyspnca and pain in the chest,
bronchitis, rales and rhonchi, broncbospasm, tremor
of the fingers and arms, radiographic reticulation. Sec
also specific compounds.
These are common air contaminants.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CYANIDE
CAS RN: 57125
mf: C'.'1-; mw: 26.02
SYN: CYANURE. (FRl::.!'-CHJ
TOXICITY DATA:
ipr-mus LOSO: J mg/kg
3
NIOSH ~-GS 7175000
CODE:'/:
NATUAS 228.1315.i0
TLV: Air: 5 mg/m3 DTL vs• 4, 109,80. Toxicology Re-
view: CLCHAU 19,361,73. "NIOSH Manual of Ana-
lytical Methods" VOL I 116, VOL 3 S250. Reponed
in EPA TSCA Inventory, 1980.
THR: Cyanide directly stimulates the chemoreceptors of
the carotid and aortic bodies with a resultant hype,-
pnea. Cardiac irregularities are often noted. but the
heart invariably outlasts the respirations. Death is due
to respiratory arrest of central origin. It can occur
within seconds or minutes of the inhalation of high
concentrations of hydrogen cyanide gas. Because of
slower absorption, death may be more delayed after
the ingestion of cyanide salts, but the critical events
still occur within the first hour.
Two other sources of cyanide have been responsible
for human poisoning. One of these is amygdalin, a cya-
nogenic glycoside found in apricot, peach, and similar
fruit pits and in sweet almonds. Amygda!in is a chemi-
cal combination of glucose, benzaldehyde, and cyanide
from which the latter can be released by the action
of ,B-glucosidase or emulsin. Although these enzymes
are not found in mammalian tissues, the human intesti-
nal microflora appears to possess these or similar en-
zymes capable of effecting cyanide release resulting in
human poisonmg. For this reason amygdalin may be
as inuch as 40 times more toxic by the oral route as
compared with intravenous injection. Amygdalin is the
major ingredient of Laetrile, and this alleged anticancer
drug has also been responsible for human cyanide poi-
soning. An ethical drug that may also cause cyanide
poisoning in overdose is the potent vascular smooth
muscle relaxant sodium nitroprusside. Although nitro-
prusside is related chemically to ferricyanide, unlike
the latter it penetrates into erythrocytes and rC3Cts with
hemoglobin to release its cyanide (Smith and Kruszyna,
1974). Fortunately, the therapeutic margin for nitro-
prusside appears to be quite large.
Cyanide is commonly found in certain rat and pest
poisons, silver and metal polishes, photographic solu-
tions, and fumigating prodm.:ts. Compounds such "
pota:-.sium cyanide can also bt: readily purchac;ed fro
chemic~! 'itor~s .. CyaniJ._e is readily ab\orbed from ~
rouu.:s, mdudmg tht: skin. mu mem, and by inhal, al-
though alkali salts of cyariidt: are toxic only when in.
gested. OP.:.1th may occur with ingestion of even small
amounts of sodium or potassium cyanide and can OCcur
within mi~u~es or ho~rs depending on route of expo..
sure. lnha1auon of mx1c fumes represents a potentially
rapidly fatal type of exposure. Sodium nitroprussidc
(Smith and Kruszyna. 1974) and apricot seeds (Sayre
and Kaymakcalan, 1964) have also caused cyanide poi-
soning. A blood cyanide level of greater than 0.2 µ.g;
ml is considered toxic. Lethal cases have usually had
levels above I µ.g/ml. Clinically, cyanide poisoning is
reported to produce a bittec, almond odor on the breath
of the patient; however, only a _small proportion of
the population is genetically able to discern this charac-
teristic odor. Typically, cyanide has a bitter, burning
taste, and following poisoning, symptoms of salivation, ·
nausea without vomiting, anxiety, confusion, venigo,
giddiness. lower jaw stiffness, convulsions, opisthoto-
nos. paralysis, coma, c.irdiac arrhythmias. and transient
respiratory stimulation followed by respiratory failure
may occur. Bradycardia is a common finding, but in
most cases heartbeat usually outlasts respiration (Wex-
ler et al., l 94i). A prolonged expiratory phase is consid-
ered to be characteristic of cyanide poisoning.• The
volatile cyanides resemble hydrocyanic acid physiologi-
cally, inhibiting tissue oxidation and causing death
through asphyxia. Cyanogen is probably as toxic as ··
hydrocyanic acid; the nitriles are generally considered
somewhat less toxic, probably because of their lower
volatility. The non-volatile cyanide salts appear to be
relatively non-toxic systemically, so long as they arc
not ingested and care is taken to prevent the formation
of hydrocyanic acid. Workers, such as electroplaters
and picklers, who are daily exposed to cyanide solutions
may develop a "cyanide" rash, characterized by itching,
and by macular, papular, and vesicular eruptions. Fre-
quently there is secondary infection. Exposure to small
amounts of cyanide compounds over long periods of
time is reported to cause loss of appetite, headache,
weakness, nausea, dizziness, and symptoms of irr of
the upper respiratory tract and eyes. See also specific
compounds.
Fire Hazard: Mod, by chemical reaction with heat, mois-
ture, acid. Many cyanides evolve hydrocyanic aci4
rather easily. This is a flam gas and is highly taxi_':-.
Carbon dioxide from the air is sufficiently acidic to_
liberate hydrocyanic acid from cyanide solutions. See
also hydrocyanic acid.
Explosion Hazard: See hydrocyanic acid. Explodes '1[
melted with nitrite or chlorate @ about 450°. Violen"f
reaction with F2, Mg, nitrates, HNO,, nitrites. -.•
Disaster Hazard: Dangerous; on contact with acid, actii
: (umcs, water or steam, they will produce toxic ana
. 8am vapors.
. .. 2nd • Casarett and Doull's,"Toxicology, the basic Science of Poisons Nc,i,i
ed. OouU. KJ.auscn and Amdur (eds). Macmillan Pub. Co. Inc.
York, N.Y.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ATTACHMENT NO. 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Heat stress Guidelines
Heat Rash (or Prickly Heat}:
o Cause: Continuoos exposure to hot arrl humid air (aggravated by
chafing clothing).
o Synptgns: Eruption of red piltples aroord sweat ducts acx:iatpanied by
intense itching arrl tingling.
o Treatment: Rem:Jve sources or irritation arrl cool the skin with water
or wet clothes.
Heat Crai,q:s or Heat Prostration:
0
0
0
Cause: Profuse perspiration acx:iatpanied by inadequate replenishment
of body water arxl electrolytes.
Symptom: Sudden develcpnent of pain arrl,lor muscle spasms in the
abdaninal region.
Treatment: Rem:lve the -worker to the contamination reduction zone.
:Rem:lve protective clothing. Decrease body tenperature arxl allc,,J a
period of rest in a cool location.
Heat Exhaustion:
o Cause: overexert.ion in a: hot environment arrl profuse perspiration
aa::aipanied by inadequate replenishment for body water am
electrolytes.
0
0
Symptom: MJSO.llar weakness, staggering gait, nausea, dizziness, arrl
shallc,,J breathing.
Treatment: Perfonn the follc,,Jing wle sinw.taneoosly naking
arran:Jements for transport to a medical facility:
Reiiove the -worker to the contamination :reduction zone. Rem::lve
prote:tive clothing. Lie the -worker down on his or her back in a
cool plaoe arrl raise the feet 6 to 12 in::nes. Keep the worker warm,
b.Jt loosen all clothing. If he or she is OJnSCioos, provide sips of
a salt-water solution (one teaspoon in 12 a.iooes). Transport the
-worker to medical facility.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Heat stroke:
o Cause: same as heat e>Chaustion.
o syng:,tans: No perspiration, dry mouth, pain in the head, dizziness,
arrl nausea.
o TreatJnent: Perfonn the follc:Min;J \<tlile nakirg arran;Jements for
transport to a medical facility:
Renove the worker to the contamination reduction zone. Renx:lVe
protective clothin:J. Lie the worker down in a cool place arrl raise
the head arrl shoulders slightly. Cool withrut dullirg. Fq:ply ice
bags or cold -wet cloth to the head. ~e bare skin with CXlOl water
or IU!:X>ing alcohol. If possible, place the worker in a tub of cool
water. D:> not give stinu.!lants. Transport to a medical facility.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SEX:TICN 5. 0
SAT.ISFJICl.'ICN OF FmMl'I'l'IlC ~
l\s state:l in Section 121 (e) of the SUperfun:l A1rendments an:i Reauthorization Act
of 1986 (SARA), ''No Federal, State,· or local permit shall be required for the
portion of airf renrival or rezoodial action corrlucted entirely onsite, where such
rezoodial action is selected an:i carrie:i out in cc.rrpliarx::e with this section".
If discharge of treate:l wastewater frc:an the site to a surroorr::1in:J river or stream
is required, awlication will be :made for a NPDES permit an:i authorization to
consti:uct: a · treatment system frc:an the North carolina Department of . Natural
Resoorces an:i canmunity Developnent.
Additionally, airf :materials required to be rem:we:i frc:an the site as hazardous
waste durirg the RI/F'S, will be disposed at a suitable site, permitted unier the
Resource Conservation an:i Recovery Act (RCRA) as a hazardous waste treatment,
storage, disposal facility.
roP.5 5-1 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~(fi 6.0
Dl\TAMAN7lGEMENI'
rata management involves maint.ainin:J an:i controllinJ field data, laboratory
analytical data, an:i any other data relevant to the project.
Only l:xJurrl field log books will be used for reo:irdinJ field data. 'Ille
Macon/D:x::kery project will have its own field log book which will not be used for
any other project. Entries in the field log book will be dated an:i the t:irre of
entry will be reo:irded. Sanple =llection data described in the SanplinJ an:i
Analysis Plan as well as visual obsel:vations will be documented in the field log
book. Aey sample =llection equiprent, field analytical equiprrent, an:i equiprrent
used to make i;ilysical measurarents will be identified in the field logbook.
calculations, results, an:i calibration data for field sampling, field analytical,
an:i field i;ilysical measurarent equiprent will be reo:irded also. Once a:m,pleted,
the field logbook will beo:m3 part of the project file.
Office data management will involve settinJ up an:i maintaininJ a project file.
'Ille project file will =nsist of the followinJ sections an:i subsections.
FOP.6
o J\dmi.nistrative
0
0
External an:i Internal a.,nesflOmence
Notes/Minutes of MeetinJs an:i Fhone Conversations
Personnel, Organization an:i Responsibilities
PlanninJ an:i SchedulinJ
Quality Assurance AuditinJ an:i Inspection Reports
En,ineerinJ
Site Work Plan
Project ~tions Plan
calculations
Analytical rata
laboratory
Field
6-1 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0 Procurement
o:mtract/PUrchase Order
Cll.an:JeOrder
Bid Evaluations
o Drawin;Js
'.lhe project file will be maintained by doaJrrent control personnel usin;J a
doa.unentation leg for each section.
be route:l to the Project Manager
All project related infonnation will first
who will be responsible for routin;J the
infonnation to awropriate project personnel.
roP.6 6-2 4262-1-1000
I
I
I
I
I
I QUALITY ASSURANCE
MANUAL
I
I AUGUST, 1988
I
I
,I
I
cl
I
cl
I
1
I
(
I
u
I
••
I
I
I)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ll
I
-I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
(
I l.
I
I
I
11
I
I
SECTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
0.
P.
Q.
QUALITY ASSURANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION
Quality Assurance Policy
Laboratory Organization
Quality Assurance Objectives
Sample Custody
Instrument Calibration
Analytical Procedures
Laboratory Quality Control Checks
Data Reduction and Reporting
Performance and System Audits
Preventive Maintenance
Specific Quality Control Procedures
Corrective Action for Data lnadC4uacy
Quality Assurance Performance Repons to
Management
Personnel Qualifications and Resumes
Facilities
Laboratory Instrumentation
· Chemicals and Reagents
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
cl
I
n
A. Quality Assurance Policy
IEA QA Manual
Section A
Page 1 of 1
Date: August,1988
It is the policy of IEA to provide legally and scientifically defensible analytical data to clients. The
management and staff at IEA are committed to maintaining a carefully controlled analytical
environment which assures the consistent generation of accurate data.
Detailed written analytical procedures are used to ensure strict adherence to published analytical
methods throughout the laboratory. Bench-level quality control measures with well defined
acceptance criteria are included in each analytical procedure employed by the laboratory. Laboratory
records and quality control data are monitored by management on a regular basis.
This manual is a written description of the structures employed by IEA to ensure that all data
generated by the laboratory is accurate and defensible.
-=i liliiiil liiiiil -_. --------._ liiii.i 11111 -.i liiil liiil
(Acting)
MANAGER
QUALITY
ASSURANCE
(P. Rapdale)
INDUSTRIAL & ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSTS
ORGANIZATIONAL CHART
MANAGEMENT STAFF
PRESIDENT
{F. Doane)
MANAGER MANAGER ADMIN. cmEF
CUSTOMER ANALYTICAL omCER FINANOAL
SERVICE OPERATIONS omCER
(P. Ragsdale) (M. RandaD) (F. Blair) (R. Walker)
MANAGER
SYSTEMS
DEVELOPMENT
(ff. Doane)
t::I 'V Cl> ., ., n,
" .. 0 n, n, " .. ....
.... 0 ~ 0 " .. "' "' C: ., V,
"
·-llill liiiil
I
ASST. SUPV.
GC/MS
(S. Griffin)
---1111] .. liiill .. liiiil
INDUSTRIAL & ENVIRONMENT AL ANALYSTS
ORGANIZATIONAL CHART
SUPERVISOR
GC/MS & GC
(I'. Niemi)
ANALYTICAL SERVICES
TECHNICAL
OFFICER
(G. Folk)
I
ASST. SUPV.
GC
(K. Scott)
MANAGER
ANALYTICAL SERVICES
(M. RandaD)
SUPERVISOR
METALS
(A. Lyntb)
SUPERVISOR
JNORGANICS
(D. Johnson)
SUPERVISOR
SAMPLE PREP
(D. Johnson)
CLP
PROJECT
MANAGER
(L. Helms)
"' ..., D> D> ,. .. .. .. ..
"' ~ 0 .. ... " .. V, ,. . ....
'°
"' .. n ,. ... ,
0 :,
"'
,
rail lill --------.. -
-. -lliil liiil ,-. liiiil iiiil
INDUSTRIAL & ENVIRONMENT AL ANALYSTS
ORGANIZATIONAL CHART
FINANCE / MARKETING / FIELD OPERATIONS
CHIEF
FINANCIAL OFFICER
(R. Walker)
I
SUPERVISOR MARKETING FINANCE &
FIELD OPER. MANAGER ACCOUNTING
(C. Bagley) (L. Treadaway) (J. Horton)
(A. Stnens)
I I
PROJECT TECHNICAL MARKETING
TECHNICIAN SALES REP. ASSISTANT
(W. Paschal) (S. Mullen) (S. Makepeace)
-iiiil liiiill
t:I "' "' .. .. ,.
rt oo n ,. ,. rt .. ,.,.. .
... 0 ~ 0 ::, ..... "' C .. V,
rt . ....
"' 00 00
-liiliil liiiil lilll
I
SHIPPING &
RECEIVING
SUPERVISOR
(G. Gineland)
' , ------lliil -.. iiiill
INDUSTRIAL & ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSTS
ORGANIZATIONAL CHART
I
CUSTOMER
SERVICE
COORDINATOR
(J. Niemi)
I
CUSTOMER
SERVICE
REPRESENTATIVE
(A. Rue)
CUSTOMER SERVICE
MANAGER
CUSTOMER SERVICE
(P.Ragsdale)
I
CUSTOMER
SERVICE
ASSISTANT
(A. Hoffman)
I
LIMS
SUPERVISOR
B. Brown
I
COMPUTER
OPERATOR
(S. Edwards)
liilil -liiil liiil
COMPUTER .., "' ' a, I> I
OPERATOR oo n ) .... .... ,(
~ 0 )
(Pending) " 0 " HI td 2
V, • • •
, '
lliiil liiill --
PURCHASING
(M, Donn)
' ' --iilil .. llill iiiil liilil iiiiil liiiii1 iiiil
INDUSTRIAL & ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSTS
ORGANIZATIONAL CHART
ADMINISTRATION
FACILITIES &
MAJNJ'ENANCE
(M. Dames)
ADMINISTRATIVE
OFFICER
(F. Blair)
PERSONNEL RECEPTIONIST
Cl "d ti> lb lb ID ,. oo n ,. ,. .. .. ... u, 0 ► " " 0 ~ ... "" ., u, ..
...
"' 00
00
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Quality Assurance Objectives
IEA QA Manual
Section C
Page 1 of 1
Date: August, 1988
The objectives of IEA are to supply precise accurate data repons to clients which are representative
of the sample supplied. All data reported are generated and calculated according to published
methods which are recognized standards of the environmental laboratory industry. Thus, data
reported by IEA are calculated and reported in units which are consistent with data produced by
other organizations. IEA strives to ensure that each data report is 100% complete, containing all
data elements and supporting documentation for the type of report requested by the client.
The precision and accuracy control limits employed by IEA are based primarily on limits contained
in the published methods or required by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's Contract
Laboratory Program (CLP). When warranted by IEA's historical data, more restrictive control
limits are set than those cited by the method or the CLP.
The precision and accuracy requirements for each analytical method are included in the individual
laboratory standard operating procedures (SOPs).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
_I
I
=I
I
I
I
I
D. Sample Custody
IEA QA Mhnual
SectionD
Page 1 of 10
Date: August, 1988
Due to the critical nature of the samples analyzed, IEA maintains strict security within the
laboratory. Entrances to the laboratory are secured through the use of deadbolts and pushbutton
combination locksets. Visitors to IEA must enter through the lobby and sign in at the reception
desk. Visitors to the office and/or laboratory must be accompanied by an employee at all times.
Samples are received in the shipping and receiving department by the sample custodian_ or by an
authorized member of the department Upon receipt, the shipping container and the individual
sample containers are inspected for damage. If any damage is present, a note is made in the project
file and the project manager or customer service department is notified. All sample information
supplied by the client is reviewed and checked against the samples received. The number and type
of samples received and the identity tags/labels are checked against the information supplied.
Each sample is assigned an IEA sample number. The IEA sample number is a combination of the
IEA Client Number, IEA Client Project Number and the Sample Sequence Number.
Example• Sample number 789-100-2 refers to the second sample in the one hundredth
project submitted by IEA client 789.
. Each container is labelled with the assigned IEA sample number. If multiple containers are received
for a single sample a unique alpha character is added to the end of the sample number assigned to
each container. This practice allows each analysis to be traced to a single sample container.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-1
I ~•
I
I
IEA QA Manual
Section D
Page 2of 10
Date: August, 1988
Each sample received is listed in the IEA Sample Check-In Log with the IEA sample number, client
ID number, a complete description of each sample received, sample condition at the time of receipt,
date of receipt, sample numbers or identifiers and any problems encountered in the course of
receiving the samples. The receipt of chain-of-custody records with the sample shipment is also
noted on the check-in log.
A project Data Sheet is completed for each set of samples received. This form serves as the primary
source of information for the laboratory. The number and type of samples and sample containers
received for the project are listed on the Project Data Sheet as well as type of analysis required, type
of repon required, turn around time and degree of chain-of-custody documentation required.
In-lab chain-of-custody records are maintained for each sample when requested by the client. For
these samples, the in-lab chain-of-custody record is initiated upon sample receipt Each movement
of a sample or sample extract container into and out of the locked refrigerator system is recorded
with date, time, bottle number, action (check in or check out), and signature of the individual
accepting or relinquishing responsibility of the sample. The chain-of-custody records are kept in
the associated project folder.
After receipt, samples are housed in locked refrigerators. Samples are removed from the
refrigerators by authorized employees for analysis and returned to the locked refrigerator system
after completion of the analysis. Throughout the analytical process, each sample is either in the
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IEA QA Manual
Section D
Page 3 of 10
Date: August, 1988
possession of authorized laboratory personnel or secured in a locked refrigerator inside the secured
laboratory area.
Analytical data reports are kept in filing cabinets which are locked at the end of each business day.
Sensitive documents are shredded prior to disposal.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,: I
I
:1
I
I
No. or Samples:
Date Needed
By Client:
P.O. Number:
Parameters
Requested
Comments:
. Shm To:
TR.ANSPAK REQUEST FORM •
oL~ '<n. ~.-,auua .1.
Section D
Page 4 of 10
Date: August, 1988
Type of Sample: OYatcr, Soit Sluder, Other)
· (Clrde One)
Ship By: (Cuss Pldrup, J JPS. 2-Day J JPS, f'cd·f'.Jl
(Circk One)
Label
I • I Bdl To:
Bottle
Type
No. or
Bottles Preservative
# TransPaks:
Large
Small ·
Coolers
Client:
I
----------. I Oient:
Client Rep:
Address:
Phone No:
Initiated By:
Shipped By:
I Address:
I
I
I Attention:
I
I _______ L ______ _
Date:
Date:
I
I
'·1
I
(.
I
I
·I
I
1c
I
l
I
I (..
I
I
I
I
ii
I
I
SAMPLER INSTRUCTIONS
lU\ QA Manual
Section D
Page 5 of 10
Date, August, 1988
This sample package has been prepared for you with the objective of helping to maintain the
integrity of your samples. It is therefore vital that you read and follow these instructions.
1. Carefully open the sample package and check the contents. If any bottles are missing,
broken, or damaged, call the laboratory immediately at 919-467-9919.
2. Remove and freeze the freezer packs included with the shipping container for at least eight
hours. They must be solidly frozen upon packing the samples for return shipment. The
freezer packs will maintain a sufficient cool temperature for approximately 72 hours.
3. Note the following before sampling:
4.
5.
6.
3.1 40 ml VoJati!e YiaJs
40 ml volatile vials must not contain any air bubbles. Fill the vial to just below
the point of overflow, until there is a convex meniscus (see picture at the left).
Carefully slide the teflon insen over the meniscus, teflon (stiff) side down
(against the sample). Screw the cap on the vial, and check for air bubbles. If
air bubbles are present, repeat the capping procedure, or draw another sample, if
necessary. Volatile bottles do not normally contain preservative chemicals.
3.2 Bacteria Sampling BottJes
Handle sterile bacteria sampling bottles carefully to avoid contamination. Do not
open the bottles until ready to sample. Fill to within half an inch of the top, and
tighten the cap securely.
3.3 -Other Sampling BottJes
Some sample bottles contain strong acids or bases as preservatives. These bottles
have color coded cautionary labels. Handle with care. Do not pre-rinse or overfill
bottles having color coded cautionary labels. Tighten cap securely when filled. The
color code used is as follows:
Red:
Yellow:
Blue:
White:
Green:
Preserved with nitric• acid
Preserved with sulfuric acid
Preserved with hydrochloric acid
No preservative
Preserved with sodium hydroxide
(basic) solution
Complete the sample tags and labels by filling in the sample LD., sampling address, the
sampling point, date and time (24 hr. fonnat; for example: 8:00 am = 0800 hours or I0:00
pm= 2100 hours). Indicate if the sample is a grab or composite. The sampler should initial
at the appropriate space.
Make sure all caps are secure, and attach labels and tags to correct bottles. Repack the
samples for return shipment to the laboratory, making sure to include the freezer packs. Ship
by a route which will ensure delivery within 72 hours.
If you have any questions, call IEA 's sample receiving depanment, or our client
representative, at 919-467-9919 between 8:00 am and 4:30 pm Monday through Friday.
I
I
I
.I
I
I
I
·1
I
I
.I
I
=I
I
=1
I
ii
I
I
DATA FOR PROJECT NO.
*Client
:,ecc1on u Page 6 of 10
Date, August, 1988 ----------'
Telephone __________ _
Project 1.D.
_________________ *Purchase Order No.
*Client Rep.
*Address
Co
*Billing Address
IEA
ID
mments:
Client
ID
____ Same as Above __ _
•Paramtter(s)
Requested
Sub-Client _________ _
Other (see below)
•Bottle Siu &
Type Preservative •Location
.Yumaround Requirements
No. or Pricing
WorkdaxsC3> .fml2t
Normal 15 1.0 Ji -
Rush · -Ji --
Sampling Dale · _______ •Dale Samples ReceivedCll ______ •Dale Projccl Duc(l)
•Matrix ---------Cuslomer Signature
Lab Completion ---F'mal Review ---DaleSruppcd ___ _
/lnilUJ/s/ (lnilUJ/s/
(I) Samples =ived after 2:00 pm will be assigned the date of the following Wllllcday.
(2) Represents the dale tha! results are shipped 10 lhe customer.
(3) Excludes weekends and holidays.
---)-I ... --.... --iiill iiiil ;.;: -~:~·· ---· ~ lndus1rtol & Envtronmen1ol Analysts, Inc. CHAIN OF CUSTODY RECORD PROJ. NO. PROJECT NAME NO. SAMPLERS:,~-, 0, CON-I I TAINl!AI STA.NO. OATI TIMI STATION LOCATION • , Rellnqulthed by: ,,.__, 0../Tlnw Recelwdby:ISli,•-1 ReUnqult!Md by: rs.•rw,o/ Rtllnqullhed by: '""•••I Oet9 iTlnw Remlwd by: ,_,.,_,, Rtllnquithed by: ,,,,,,..,,,, R,ll.....,ithed by: f~-1 O.• /Tlnw R..twed fo.-uboraiory by: Om/Time Rtmark1 ,_._,,., 11111-: 0rttfNI Aaoo,_,._ ....,_; Cap, te ,....,, .... .. ----REMARKS· Oet9 /Tlnw R..twed by: is..,,_, Otta /Tlnw Remi-.d by: ~.,,., .. .... "' 00 00 "' ID n " ... 0 :, ti "' O> .. ID .... 0 .., .... 0 > C .. C " "
r
I
(I
I
cl
I
(I
I
(I
I
I
PROJE1...1 NO.
,i>Ct.; L 1.Ull U
Page 8 of 10
Dater August, 1988
PROJECT FOLDER CHECK-OUT
ANALYST NAME DATE TIME RET.
.
-iiiil -
Project Number: ___ _
Sample Hatrh:
--
IEA
LABORATORY
CHAIN-OF-CUSTODY REPORT
Sample Number:. ___ _
• ••
iiiiil iiii1 liiiil iiilil 11111
Page
Receipt Date:
Received by:
Bottle Type: f Received: Alpha Bottle ID: Bottle Type: I Received Alpha Bottle Iri:
IEA Semple I Client ID Analysis Type
R E
R E
R E
RE
RE
R E
R E
RE
R E
Storage ----Semple In -----1---Semple Out ---Location Signature Dat~ Time Signature Date Time Comments:
--
- -
- ---•
--
--
--
----
--
--
-
I .
t:I .... "' • .. .. .. ~ = er a .. .. rt .. ... .(
C .. C -rt .
"' 00 00
"' 2 )
0 ii ... t:I ~ .
0 ..
~
?roject llu:ber:
Sample Katrlx:
iiiiil
IEA
LABORATORY
CHAIN-OF-CUSTODY REPORT
Sample Number: ___ _
-
Receipt Date:
Received by:
Storage ----Sample In -----1----Sample Out ---
Page
Client ID Analy,I, Type Location Signature Date Time Signature Date Time Comment!:
R E
R E
R E
R E
R E
R E
R E
R E
R E
R E
R E
R E
R E
-----RE
.
•
•
•
•
--
---
--
--
--
--
--
--
---
---
---
--
--
---
I
I -
I ---I ---' I
I -

-
-~
-

-
I --. . -:
I -
---I --I -I --
-
-
-
C "d I .. .. ' ... 00 ' i~' !~!
,: ..., ..
~ .. ;o
00 00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(I
I
E. Instrument Calibration
IEA QA Manual
Section E
Page l of 7
Date: August, 1988
Because of the critical relationship between instrument calibration and the accuracy of the analytical
data generated, IEA maintains strict controls on calibration. Each type of instrumentation is
calibrated prior to sample analysis. Specific criteria for the instrument calibrations must be met
before samples may be processed. Deviations from the stated criteria are strictly forbidden.
Hardcopy records of all instrument calibrations are maintained in the individual laboratories. These
records are reviewed each week by the laboratory supervisors and are audited monthly by the QA
Officer.
Calibration requirements are instrument and analysis specific. The requirements for the analysis of
volatile, semivolatile, pesticide and inorganic compounds are described in the following sections
according to the instrumentation utilized for analysis.
GC/MS
IEA has elected to employ the calibration criteria of the CLP protocols for all GC/MS analyses
performed regardless of the method. Five-point calibrations are performed with continuing
calibration checks being performed at the beginning of every twelve (12) hour period of analysis
time. Designated calibration check compounds (CCC), system performance check compounds
(SPCC) and relative standard deivations (%RSD) are required to meet specified criteria for response
factors before samples are analyzed.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Table E-1: Volatile Calibration Specifics
IEA QA Manual
Section E
Page 2 of7
Date: August, 1988
The multipoint calibration standards consist of solutions containing all analytes at 20, 50, 100, 120,
and 200 ug/1.
The continuing calibration standard contains all analytes at 50 ug/1.
The CCCs are vinyl chloride, 1,1-dichloroethene, chloroform, 1,2-dichloropropane, toluene and
ethylbenzene.
The SPCCs are chloromethane, 1,1-dichloroethane, bromoform. 1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane and
chlorobenzene.
Table E-2: Acceptance Criteria for Volatile Calibrations
CCC
SPCC
MyJtipojnt CaHhratjon
% RSD for all 5 standards
must be less than or equal
to 30%.
The average relative response
factor for bromoform must
be 0.250 or greater. The
average relative response factor
for all other SPCCs must be
0.300 or greater.
Contjnuioi: Calibration
% difference when compared to the
average relative response in the
mulitipoint cannot exceed 25%.
The relative response factor for
bromoform must be 0.250 or greater.
The relative response factor for all
other SPCCs must be 0.300 or
greater.
I
I
I
·•
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IEA QA Manual
Section E
Page 3 of. 7
Date: August, 1988
Table E-3: Semivolatile Calibration Specifics
The multipoint calibration standards consist of solutions containing all analytes at 20, 50, 80, 120
and 160 ug/1.
The continuing calibration standards contains all analytes at 50 ug/1.
The CCCs are phenol, 1,4-dichlorobenzene, 2-nitrophenol, 2,4-dinitrophenol,
hexachlorobutadiene, benzo (a) pyrene, 4-chloro-3-methylphenol, 2,4,6-trichlorophenol,
acenaphthene, N-nitrosodiphenylamine, pentachlorophenol, and di-n-octyphthalate.
The SPCCs are N-nitroso-di-n-propylamine, 4-nitrophenol, hexachlorocyclopentadiene, and
2,4-dinitrophenol.
Table E-4: Acceptance Criteria for Semivolatile Calibrations:
CCC
SPCC
MuUjpojnt CaJjbratjon
% RSD for all 5 standards
must be less than or equal
to 30%.
The average relative response
factor for all SPCCs must be
0.050 or greater.
Contjnujng CaJjbratjon
% difference when compared to the
average relative response in the multipoint
cannot exceed 25%.
The relative response factor for all SPCCs
must be 0.050 or greater.
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
cl
I
(I
I
l
I
I
IEA QA Manual
Section E
Page 4of 7
Date: August, 1988
IEA has elected to employ the calibration criteria of the CLP protocols for the complex pesticides
analyses. Three-point calibrations of aldrin, endrin, p,p'-DDT and dibutylchlorendate are
performed at the beginning of each 72-hour period to verify linearity. The %RSD for each of these
compounds which will be quantitated in the subsequent sample analyses must be less than or equal
to 10%. After the linearity verification, single point calibrations are performed for each single
component pesticide and each multicomponent mixture prior to sample analysis. All quantitations
are performed using the single point standard(s) analyzed in closest proximity to the sample
analysis.
The volatile analyses by GC are performed according to methods 601 and 602. Three-point
calibrations are performed for these analyses. The %RSDs obtained for each compound in the three
calibration analyses determine the type of quantitation performed. If all %RSDs are 10% or less,
the average response factor of each compound is used for quantitation. For any compound having a
%RSD greater than 10%, quantitation is performed using the calibration curve rather than the
average response factor. At the beginning of each day of analysis, the current three-point
calibration is vcrfied through the analysis of a 20 ug/1 standard. If the calculated concentration for
each compound is within the acceptance range, sample analysis is performed using the current
multipoint calibration. If one or more analyte concentrations are outside the acceptance ranges, a
new three -point calibration is performed before any samples are analyzed. The acceptance ranges
are listed in Tables E-5 -E-6.
'
'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
IEA QA Manual
Section E
Page 5 of 7
Date: August, 1988
Table E-5: Method 601 Continuing Calibration Acceptance Criteria
Analyte Concentration % of True YaJue
Bromodichloromethane 15.2 • 24.8 76% -124%
Bromoform 14.7 · 25.3 74% -127%
Bromomethane 11.7 -28.3 59% -142%
Carbon Tetrachloride 13.7 -26.3 69% -132%
Chlorobenzene 14.4 -24.6 72% -123%
1,2-Chloroethylvinyl ether 15.4 -28.0 77%-140%
Chloroform 12.0 -25.0 60%-125%
Chloromethane 15.0 -28.1 75% -141 %
Dibromochloromethane 11.9 -26.9 60%-135%
1 ,2-Dichlorobenzene 13.1 -26.0 66%-130%
1,3-Dichlorobenzene 14.0 -30.1 70% -151 %
1,4-Dichlorobenzene 9.9 -26.1 50% -131 %
1,1-Dichloroethane 13.9 -23.2 70%-116%
1 ,2~ Dichloroethane 16.8 -25.7 84%-129%
l, 1-Dichloroethene 14.3 -27.4 72% -137%
trans-1,2-Dichloroethene 12.6 -27.2 63%-136%
1,2-Dichloropropane 12.8 -25.2 64% -126%
cis-1,3-Dichloropropene 14.8 -27.2 74% -136%
trans-1,3-Dichloropropene 12.8 -27.2 64%-136%
Methy Jene chloride 12.8 -24.5 64%-123%
l, 1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane 15.5 -30.2 78%-151%
Tetrachloroethene 9.8 -26.0 49%-130%
1, l, 1-Trichloroethane 14.0 -25.8 70%-129%
1, 1,2-Trichloroethane 15.7 -24.3 79%-122%
Trichlorofluoromethane 15.4 -24.6 77%-123%
Trichlorofluoromethane 13.3 -26.7 67%-134%
Vinyl chloride 13.7 -26.3 69%-132%
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(I
I
I
ll
I
(I
I
(I
I
I
IEA QA Manual
Section E
Page 6 of 7
Date: August, 1988
Table E-6: Method 602 Continuing Calibration Acceptance Criteria
Analyte Concentration % of True Value
Benzene 15.4 · 24.6 77% -123%
Toluene 16.1 · 23.9 81% -119%
Ethylbenzene 13.6 -26.4 68%-132%
Chlorobenzene 14.5 -25.5 73%-128%
1,4-Dichlorobenzene 13.9 -26.1 70%-131%
1,2-Dichlorobenzene 12.6 -27.4 63%-137%
1,3-Dichlorobenzene 15.5 -24.5 78%-123%
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:I
I
I
I
MetaJs
IEA QA Manual
Section E
Page 7 of 7
Date: August, 1988
The metals analyses are performed according to the procedures published in Test Methods for
EvaJuatjn~ So!jd Waste SW-846. Three point instrument calibrations are performed and two
additional standards in the analytical range are analyzed. A minimum correlation coefficient of
0.997 is required for each calibration curve. One of the additional standards must be close to the
quantitation limit (no more than 2-3 times the quantitation limit).
The calibration is verified using a standard obtained from a source other than that of the normal
calibration standards. The source for the verification standard may be a government agency such as
U.S. EPA or may be purchased from a commercial vendor. The calibration is verified after
calibration of the instrument and after every ten sample analyses.
MjsceJlaoeous Inoreanjcs
Calibration curves consisting of a minimum of three points arc prepared for each miscellaneous
inorganics analysis. A minimum correlation coeficient of 0.997 is required for each calibration
curve. The calibration curves arc verified through the analysis of a standard obtained from a source
other than that of the calibration standards. Each calibration curve must include a low level standard
which is no more than 2-3 times the quantitation limit The standard curve is verified after the
initial calibration and after every ten samples analyses.
I
I
I
.I
I
I
I
rl
I
I
I
I C
I
1
I
I
F. Analytical Procedures
IEA QA Manual
Section F
Page 1 of2
Date: August, 1988
The analytical methods employed by IEA for the analysis of environmental samples include
methods published in the following: Test for Eva)uating So)jd Waste, PhysjcaVChemjcal Methods,
SW-846, USEPA 3rd Edition, 1986; Federal Register, 40. CFR, Pan 136, Volume 49, No. 209.
October 26, 1984; Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 16th Edition.
1985; Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes. EPA 600/4-79-20. 1979, (revised
1983). Methods selected for use by the USEPA Contract Laboratory Program (CLP) and published
in the statement of work for each contract arc also utiliz.ed by IEA.
Each data repon issued by IEA includes a reference to the exact method employed for the analysis.
The referenced methods arc strictly adhered to by the laboratory. Occasionally, modifications of the
referenced method arc necessary. All deviations from the published method must be approved by
the Laboratory Manager and arc stated in the final repon with the reason for the deviation. (See
Method Discrepancy/ Method Resolution repon form on page 2 of this section)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
I
' ••
I
I.E.A
lt.A \,lA 11anual
Section F
Page 2 of 2
Date: August, 1988
Project No. __
CUSTOMER PROJECT DISCREPANCY REPORT
DISCREPANCY:
By: ____ Date: __ Time: __
I RESOLUTION:
By: ____ Date: __ Time: __
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. Laboratory Quality Control Checks
IEA QA Manual
Section G
Page 1 of 6
Date: August, 1988
The analytical process is continually checked and verified through the analysis of method blanks,
instrument blanks, matrix spikes, duplicate matrix spikes and sample duplicates. The department
supervisor is responsible for the administration of the quality control checks within each
depanment. The records associated with the administration of the quality control checks are
reviewed quanerly as pan of the system and performance audits conducted by the QA Officer. The
data generated for each quality control sample are reviewed by the laboratory supervisor, laboratory
manager and a member of the senior technical staff as part of the normal data review process.
All analytes, except methylene chloride, acetone, toluene, 2-butanone, and the phthalate esters are
required to have concentrations of less than the quantitation limit in all method and instrument
blanks. Warning limits of two times the quantitation limits have been established for methylene
chloride, acetone, toluene, 2-butanone, and phthalate esters. Control limits for these compounds ' .
have been set at five times the quantitation limits.
Matrix spike duplicates are prepared and analyzed for all organic analyses at a rate of one pair for
every twenty (20) samples. The data generated for each pair of matrix spike duplicates are used to
measure the precision and accuracy of the analysis. A blank spike containing all analytes is also
prepared with each pair of duplicate matrix spikes. If the pecision or accuracy of the duplicate
spikes is outside the control limits, the blank spike must be analyzed. The analysis of the blank
spike is evaluated to determine if the analytical failure was caused by the sample matrix or by the
laboratory analyst Acceptance criteria for the matrix spike duplicate pairs analyzed for the common
organic analyses are listed. in Tables G-1 and G-2 on pages 4 and 5 of this section.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.-1
I
, .• ..
( .
I
I
I
IEA QA Manual
Section G
Page 2 of 6
Date: August, 1988
Surrogate compounds are routinely used for the organic analyses. Compounds similar to the
analytes of interest are added to each sample prior to initiation of the analytical process. The
recovery of the surrogate(s) in the final analysis is used to evaluate the accuracy and precision of the
process in each sample. Acceptable surrogate data must be obtained for each set of reponed sample
data. A database of surrogate recovery data for all samples is maintained. This database is
reviewed at least once a month by the laboratory supervisor. The QA Officer evaluates the
surrogate recovery data quarterly. Current surrogate control limits for the common organic analyses
are listed in Table G-3 on page 6 of this section.
Internal standards are employed for all GC/MS analyses. The area of the internal standards in each
sample analysis must be within the range -50% to+ 100% of the corresponding area in the current
analytical standard. The internal standard areas are evaluated periodically to ensure the consistency
of the injection techniques used throughout the laboratory .
Duplicate sample analyses are performed for the metals and inorganic parameters at a rate of one
duplicate for every ten sample analyses. Warning and control limits have .been established for each
• parameter. The specific limits have been included in the individual SOPs. Typical limits for the
metals analyses are:
Analyte Concentration Range
0.03 -0.20 mg/L
0.21 -2.00 mg/L
Relative Percent Difference CBPPl
Warning Limit
35%
15%
Control Limit
65%
20%
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
cg
I
F I .
I
I
I
IE.A QA Manual
Section G
Page 3 of 6
Date: August, 1988
Spiked sample analyses are performed for the metals and inorganic parameters at a rate of one spike
for every ten sample analyses. Warning and control limits have been established for each
parameter. The specific limits have been included in the individual SOPs. Typical limits for metals
analyses are:
Analyte Concentration Range
0.03 -0.20 mg/L
0.21 -2.00 mg/L
Warning Limit
% Recovery
± 25%
±15%
Control Limit
% Recovery
±40%
±20%
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IEA QA Manual
Section G
Page 4of6
Date: August, 1988
Table G-1: Spike Acceptance Criteria for Common Organic Analyses in Water
SeroivoJatUes by GC/MS
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
A
A
A
A
A
'fq Recovery Rm
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene 39 • 98 28 1,4-Dichlorobenzene 36-97 28
N-nitroso-di-n-propylamine 41 -116 38
Acenaphthalene 46-118 31 2,4-Dinitrotoluene 24-96 38 Pyrene 26 -127 31 Phenol 12 • 89 42 2-Chlorophenol 27 -123 40
4-Chloro-3-methylphenol 23 -80 42 4-Nitrophenol 10-80 50 Pentachlorophenol 9-103 50
For acceptance, the majority of% recoveries and RPDs for each compound class
(acid or base-neutral) in the duplicate spike pair must meet the % recoveries and RPDs
listed above.
Volatiles by GCIMS
1,1-Dichloroethane
Trichloroethane
Benzene
Toluene
Chlorobenzene
% Recovery
61 • 145
71 • 120
76 -127
76 • 125
75 • 130
Rm
14
14
11
13
13
For acceptance, the majority of% recoveries and RPDs obtained for the duplicate
spike pair must meet the % recoveries and RPDs listed above.
Pesticides by GC
Lindane
Heptachlor
Aldrin
Dieldrin
Endrin
4,4'-DDT
% Becovecv
56 -123
40-131
40-120
52 -126
56-121
38 • 127
Rm
15
20
22
18
21
27
For acceptance, the majority of% recoveries and RPDs obtained for the duplicate spike pair
must meet the % recoveries and RPDs listed above. ·
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
I
r '. I
I
I
IEA QA Manual
Section G
Page 5 of 6
Date: August, 1988
Table G-2: Spike Acceptance Criteria for Common Organic Analyses in Soil
SemjyoJatiles by GC/MS
B N 1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene
BN 1,4-Dichlorobenzene
BN N-nitroso-di-n-propylamine
BN Acenaphthalene
BN 2,4-Dinitrotoluene
BN Pyrene
A Phenol
A 2-Chlorophenol
A 4-Chloro-3-methylphenol
A 4-Nitrophenol
A Pentachlorophenol
% Recovery
38 • 107
28 -104
41-126
31 -137
28 -89
35 • 142
26-90
25 • 102
26 -103
11 • 114
17 -109
Rm
23
27
38
19
47
36
35
50
33
50
47
For acceptance, the majority of% recoveries and RPDs for each compound class
(acid or base-neutral) in the duplicate spike pair must meet the % recoveries and
RPDs listed above.
YoJatHes by GC/Ms
1, 1-Dichloroethane
Trichloroethane
Benzene
Toluene
Chlorobenzene
% Recovery
59 -172
62 • 137
66 · 142
59-139
60-133
Rm
22
24
21
21
21
For acceptance, the majority of% recoveries and RPDs obtained for the duplicate
spike pair must meet the % recoveries and RPDs listed above.
Pesticides by GC
Lindane
Heptachlor
Aldrin
Dieldrin
Endrin
4,4'-DDT
% ·Becovecv
46-127
35 • 130
34 • 132
31 • 134
42 • 139
23 • 134
Rm
so
31
43
38
45 so
For acceptance, the majority of % recoveries and RPDs obtained for the duplicate spike
pair must meet the % recoveries and RPDs listed above.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Table G·3: Surrogate Control Limits
SemivoJatiJes by GCIMS
Nitrobenzene-d5
2-Fluorobiphenyl
Terphenyl-d14
Phenol-d6
2-Fluorophenol
2,4,6-Tribromophenol
YoJatiJes by GCIMS
•······ % Recovery •······
Water SJ1il
35 -114 23 -123
43 • 116 30-115
33 -141 18 -137
10-94 24 -113
21 -100 25 -121
10 -123 19-122
IEA QA Manual
Section G
Page 6of 6
Date: August, 1988
•······ % Recovery •······
Toluene-dB
Bromofluorobenzene
1 ).-Dichloroethane-d4
Pesticides by GC
Dibutylchlorendate
Water
88-110
86 -115
76-114
SJ1il
81 -117
74 -121
70-121
•-·· % Recovery •-··
Water
24. 154*
SJ1il
20-150*
*These control limits serve as warning limits not control limits per CLP. All
other limits arecontrol limits.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
cl
I
H . Data Reduction and Reporting
IE.A QA Manual
Section H
Page 1 of 1
Date: August, 1988
The data associated with each analysis are hardcopied for permanent storage either through the
printing of computer files or through hand entry into bound laboratory notebooks. All notebook
entries are dated and signed by the analyst. Data reduction is performed either manually by the
analyst or by computer systems interfaced to the analytical instruments.
All data are subjected to a multilevel review. All data repons are reviewed by the department
supervisor prior to release for final repon generation. A cross section of data repons are reviewed
by the Laboratory Manager. All final data repons are reviewed by a member of the senior technical
staff prior to release to the client. The members of the senior technical staff are not members of the
analytical production laboratories.
Out-of-control conditions identified by the analyst, supervisor, manager or technical staff member
are investigated, corrected and documented. Out-of-control conditions which are caused by the
sample itself, are addressed in the final repon.
All elements of the quality control program must be satisfied before a data repon may be released to
the client.
\
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
••
I
·1
I. Performance and System Audits
IEA QA Manual
Section I
Page 1 of 1
Date: August, 1988
Each quaner the overall performance of the laboratory staff is evaluated and compared to the
performance outlined in the quality assurance manual and the standard operating procedures. The
QA officer conducts a laboratory audit to evaluate the performance of the laboratory staff and
compares that performance to the requirements of the quality assurance program. During this
process, the records, standard operating procedures and adherence to those standard operating
procedures are examined. The results of the audit process are summarized and issued to each
department supervisor and the Laboratory Manager.
Known intralaboratory performance samples are analyzed in the form of sample spikes, duplicates
and duplicate sample spikes on a continuing basis. Two (2) such samples are processed for every
twenty (20) production samples.
"Blind" intralaboratory performance audits arc conducted monthly. Samples containing known
analyte concentrations are introduced into the laboratory as client samples. These samples are
analyzed and reported in the same manner as normal production samples. The results and the true
values of each sample are reported to the laboratory supervisors and the laboratory clirector upon
receipt of the data by the QA officer.
IEA participates in intcrlaboratory performance audits through the various state and federal
certification programs. IEA is an active participant in the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's
Contract Laboratory Program (CLP), U.S. Army Corps of Engineers accreditation program,
Commonwealth of Virginia Contract Laboratory Program and the North Carolina, Virginia, South
Carolina, Georgia, Alabama and Tennessee drinking water (SDW A), ground water and waste water
certification programs. Each of these programs require the analysis of performance evaluation
samples which contain analytes at concentrations which are known only to the certifying agency. . '
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J. Preventive Maintenance
IEA QA Manual
Section J
Page 1 of 3
Date: August, 1988
Schedules of required maintenance have been prepared for each analytical instrument. By
scheduling routine preventive maintenance, instrument downtime is minimized with regard to
critical analytical schedules. All repair work is recorded in instrument maintenance logs with the
date, reason for the repair, action taken and name of the repair person.
Laboratory maintenance schedules for key instrumentation is summarized below:
GC/MS
Extrel Instruments
1. Change septa
2. Change disc drive filter
3. Change mechanical pump oil
4. Grease turbo pumps
5. Change column
6. Change injection pon liner
7. Check gas cylinders
Finniean OWA Instruments
1. Change septa
2. Change card cage filter
3. Change disk drive filter
4. Change mechanical pump oil
5. Change turbo pump oil ·
6. Change traps
7. Change columns
8. Change injection pon liners
9. Check gas cylinders
Frequency
daily
quanerly
quancrly
quancrly
monthly
daily
daily
Freouencv
daily
quarterly
quancrly
quarterly
&Mually
monthly
monthly
weekly
daily
I IEA QA Manual
Section J
Page 2 of3
I
Date: August, 1988
I Freauens:v
I 1. Change septa biweekly
2 .. Change injection pon liners monthly
I 3. Change column as needed
4. Wipe test ECD's semiannually
I 5. Check gas cylinders daily
I
Freauencv
I 1. Check air and nitrogen tanks daily
I 2. Check level in waste jug daily
3. Clean nebulizer tips weekly
I 4. Rinse spray chamber weekly
5. Check drain tubing for air bubbles weekly
6. Clean torch assembly monthly I 7. Check purge extension windows monthly
8. Clean purge extension windows as needed
I 9. Change vacuum pump intake trap 1000 hrs.
10. Change vacuum pump oil 1000 hrs.
I 11. Clean computer ventillation slits semiannually
I Frequency
I 1. Check dials, panel lights and control
knobs for proper functioning daily
2. Check energy of deuterium background
I correctOr daily
3. Note AA lamp output daily
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
•
I
rl
I
(I
I
I
A.A (continued)
4. Check gas and water lines for leaks
5. Check graphite tube condition
6. Clean electrodes on furnace
7. Change electrodes on furnace
8. Clean burner head
9. Clean nebulizer and burner chamber
IOC Analvzec
1. Sweep pyrolysis tube, check humid.if er
water level, check gas supplies, check
furnace temperature, change injection port
system, balance the totalizer.
2. Clean sample boat and push rod
3. Run system performance tests, lubricate
piston shaft, change septum, clean inlet tube
General Laboratory Areas
1. Clean laboratory
2. Check supply of consummable items
3. Inspect, clean and replace worn parts on
automatic pipes.
4. Calibrate automatic pipets
s. Calibrate thermometc:rS
6. Record oven refrigerator temperatures
7. Check fume hood air flow
8. Calibrate balances
IEA QA Manual
Section J
Page 3 of 3
Date: August, 1988
Frequency
monthly
daily
as needed
as needed
daily
daily
Frequency
biweekly
weekly
monthly
Freauencv
weekly
weekly
monthly
monthly
semiannually
daily
weekly
semiannually
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
K . Specific Quality Control Procedures for
Assessing Precision, Accuracy and Completeness
Precision
IEA QA Manual
Section K
Page 1 of2
Date: August, 1988
Precision is a measure of the reproducibility among replicate analyses. Relative percent difference
(RPO) is calculated for duplicate sample spikes analyzed for the organic parameters and for all of
the duplicate sample analyses performed for the inorganic parameters. Data acceptance during
normal processing is based on the specific control limits for the common analyses which are listed
in Section G -Laboratory Quality Control Checks. Data obtained for all duplicates are evaluated
monthly by the QA Officer for developing trends.
(XI -X2) RPO-______ _ X }()()
(XI +X2)n.
Accuracy
Accuracy is a measure of the degree of difference between the analytically obtained value and the
known or actual value for a sample. IEA assesses accuracy by determining the percent recovery
(%R) for analytes contained by designated quality controls samples. Acceptance criteria f~r spiked
samples processed by the laboratory are listed in Section G -Laboratory Quality Control Checks.
Data obtained' for all laboratory spikes are evaluated monthly by the QA Officer for developing
trends.
Analytical Value
%R-_______ xlOO
True Value
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Iestin~ foe Outliers
IEA QA Manual
Section K
Page 2 of 2
Date: August, 1988
The influence of "bad" data on the statistical data is controlled by discarding true outliers before the
statistical evaluations are performed. Outliers are discarded if the individual value (X) mulitiplied
by the average absolute deviation of all values from the mean (D) is greater than 2.3 times the
average absolute deviation of all values from the mean.
Completeness
Completeness is a measure of the valid data obtained from an analysis expressed as the percentage
of the total data that should have been obtained.
amount of valid data obtained
% Completeness= ~------------x 100
total amount of valid data expected
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
cl
I
I
I
L. Corrective Action for Data Inadequacy
IEA QA Manual
Section L
Page 1 of 1
Date: August, 1988
In the preceeding sections, IEA's data acceptance criteria have been presented. Failure to meet any
of the specified acceptance criteria requires correction of the failure before the analysis of reponable
sample data. Corrective action may consist of instrument maintenance, recalibration of the
equipment, reanalysis of a sample or re-extraction of a sample followed by analysis of the new
extract.
Occasionally, a failure is caused by a particular sample. In those cases, the department supervisor
or Laboratory Manager is responsible for the investigation and documentation of the problem as
well as documentation of the measures taken to control the sample induced failure. A description of
the problem and the control measures are included in the sample data repon as well as in the
laboratory records.
Problems identified during the quality control audit process are addressed in the Quality Assurance
Summary Repon with recommended corrective action(s). The implementation of the corrective
action(s) is recorded in the laboratory records with the results of each action.
I
a
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,-
1
I
I
M. Quality Assurance Reports to Management
IE.A QA Manual
Section M
Page 1 of 1
Date: August, 1988
The primary objective of IEA is to provide legally and scientifically defensible data to clients in a
timely and cost effective manner. The achievement of this goal is dependent upon an active QNQ!:,
program. The QA Officer is responsible for monitoring laboratory compliance with all elements of
the QA/QC program and communicating the status of the program to the President and other
members of the senior management.
The results of the monthly and quanerly quality assurance audits are summarized and distributed to
the President, Laboratory Manager, and department supervisors. The current surrogate recoveries,
spike recoveries, duplicate comparisons, method blanks results, recent blind QC sample results,
adherence of each department to the written quality control procedures, and any identified anomolies
in the quality control data or procedures are included in the summary repon. Corrective actions
steps are included in the summary report as required by the audit results.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
·.I
:1
:I
I
cl
I
IEA QA Manual
Section N
Page 1 of 1
Date: August, 1988
N • Personnel Qualifications
General
All persons hired or assigned to key laboratory positions at IEA work closely with experienced
personnel. Their program and performance is closely supervised and evaluated. The principal
criterion for employment or assignment is demonstrated professional proficiency at IEA or at
previous places of employment
Laboratory Staff Members
The qualifications of key laboratory staff members are summarized in the appended resumes. We
have developed an organization of technical specialists in all major disciplines of the environmental
sciences. Each person is throughly trained and experienced in his/her respective field and qualified
to function with other staff members to form an integrated team.
Required educational and experience qualifications of key laboratory persoMel are described below:
Laboratory Manager:
B.S. degree in Chemistry, with a minimum of 10 years of environmental
laboratory experience.
Customer Service Manager:
B.S. degree, with a minimum of 10 years of laboratory experience.
Quality Assurance Officer:
B.S. degree in Chemistry, with a minimum of 10 years of laboratory experience.
Laboratory Department Supervisors:
Bachelors degree in scientific discipline, with minimum of 3 years of
environmental laboratory experience or equivalent
Technical Reviewer:
B.S. degree in scientific discipline with a minimum of 2 years of environmental
laboratory experience.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Responsibility:
Education:
Experience:
Mark Randall
Manager Analytical Services
Mr. Randall is responsible for the overall administration and management of
the production laboratories. His duties include facilities planning, evaluation
and selection of analytical instrumentation, training and development of the
laboratory staff, and the assignment and evaluation of laboratory personnel.
Mr. Randall is also responsible for overseeing the administration of the
quality assurance protocols within the production laboratories.
Mr. Randall received a B.S. degree in Biology from the University of
Rhode Island in Kingston, Rhode Island in 1977.
IE.A
From February 1987 to December 1987 Mr. Randall was responsible
for the supervision of the second shift staff. In addition to his super-
visory responsibilities, he was responsible for the operation and main-
tenance of two GC/MS instruments and the review of GC/MS data.
From October 1985 to February 1987 Mr. Randall served as IEA's
Shift Supervisor and GC Chemist He also was responsible for all
identified special projects. In this capacity, he operated and maintained
the GC instrumentation, evaluated all gas chromatography data gener-
ated, developed and validated all new methods for the GC Department
and wrote the final reports for all special projects,
Grainger Laboratories, Inc.
Raleigh, North Carolina
From November 1984 to October 1985 Mr. Randall was employed as
a GC Chemist. In that capacity he was responsible for the operation
and maintenance of the GC instrumentation and evaluation of
chromatographic data.
Exxon Chemicals
Baytown, Texas
From November 1981 to October 1984 Mr. Randall was employed as
a Research Analyst In that capacity he was responsible for the super-
vision of the research laboratory. He was also responsible for the
operation of the developmental pilot units, and development and valida-
tion of new methods and procedures. ·
I
I
I
I
I
·1
I
I
t
I
1
I
(.
I
• I
I
Experience:
(continued)
Affiliations:
NUS
Mark Randall
Manager Analytical Services
(continued)
Oearlake, Texas
From October 1978 to September 1981 Mr. Randall was employed as
a Chemical Analyst In that capacity he served as a shift supervisor
with responsibility for organic extractions, metals analysis and inorganic
analysis and data interpretation.
American Industrial Hygiene Association
I
I
I
ti
I
.. ·1
I
r
I
JI
Patty L. Ragsdale
Manager Customer Service
Responsibility: Ms. Ragsdale is responsible for overseeing all phases of interaction between
IEA and clients after the sale of a product including technical assistance in
product selection and consultations on final data repons. Her departmental
responsibilities include Customer Service and Repon Generation. Ms.
Ragsdale is also responsible for the management of identified special projects.
Education: Ms. Ragsdale received a B.S. degree in Chemistry from Furman
University in Greenville, South Carolina in 1973.
Experience: CompuChem Laboratories
Research Triangle Park, Nonh Carolina
From 1986 to 1987 Ms. Ragsdale served as Director of Technical
Affairs, in that capacity she was responsible for overseeing the dev-
lopment processes involved in the introduction of new products to the
product line. She was responsible for the technical oversight and
review of impact of new methods and products on the production
laboratory, evaluation of laboratory capacities with regard to special
projects and newly developed products. She made recommendations
for product development and improvement to ensure that the laboratory
has the ability and flexibility to respond to client needs. She also
assisted the Sales and Marketing staff in matching product line elements
with client needs.
From 1984 to 1986 she was Manager Semi-Volatile Analyses. In this
position she was responsible for the management of the preparation and
analysis of each semi-volatile sample in a timely, accurate and cost
effective manner .. A custom tracking system designed and implemented
by Ms. Ragsdale allowed this laboratory to systematically process
samples according to priority from assignment of GC/MS instruments
through the data review process.
From 1983 to 1984, Ms. Ragsdale managed the Sample Preparation
Laboratory. As Manager of this section she was responsible for the
accurate and timely preparation of each sample for analysis.
From 1980 to 1983, Ms. Ragsdale was responsible for the establish-
ment and management of the Quality Control DepanmenL As Manager
Quality Control she was responsible for ensurring that the quality of the
laboratory analyses performed and the data reponed to clients were of
the best quality possible.
From 1979 to 1980, Ms. Ragsdale operated a variety of laboratory in-
struments, including GC/MS, AutoAnalyzer and gas and liquid chroma-
tographs in her position as Senior Chemist.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
(.
I
Patty L. Ragsdale
Manager Quality Assurance
(continued)
Southern Analytical, Inc.
From 1978 to 1979, Ms. Ragsdale was employed by Southern Analyti-
cal Inc. She was involved in the sales and service of gas and liquid
chromatographic systems.
South Carolina Department of Health & Environmental Control
Columbia, South Carolina
From 1974 to 1978 Ms. Ragsdale was employed by the South Carolina
Department of Health and Environmental Services. As a Olemist I, she
served as a group leader for AutoAnalyzer analyses from 1974 to
1976. During that time she worked extensively on the development of
a quality assurance program for that laboratory and six regional labora-
tories. Following promotion to Chemist II, she served as group leader
of chromatographic analyses, reviewing all chromatograms and work
associated with GC and GC/MS analyses.
South Carolina Department of Mental Health
Columbia, South Carolina
From 1973 to 1974 Ms. Ragsdale was employed by the South Carolina
Department of Mental Health as a Laboratory Specialist Her work
involved the separation of various drugs and their relative metabolites
from biological tissues and the quantitative analysis of the separated
compounds.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
I
I
I
I
Patty L. Ragsdale .
Manager Quality Assurance
Responsibility: Ms. Ragsdale is responsible for the development, implementation
and administration of IEA's quality assurance program. She is
responsible for monitoring laboratory adherance to the quality assurance
program. In fulfilling her responsibilities she conducts routine audits
and inspections, reviews laboratory data, summarizes and evaluates
quality control data, outlines corrective actions to be taken by the
laboratory as needed, and determines that necessary corrective actions
are taken.
Education: Ms. Ragsdale received a B.S. degree in Chemistry from Furman
University in Greenville, South Carolina in 1973.
Experience: CompuChem Laboratories
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
From 1986 to 1987 Ms. Ragsdale served as Director of Technical
Affairs, in that capacity she was responsible for overseeing the dev-
lopment processes involved in the introduction of new products to the
product line. She was responsible for the technical oversight and
review of impact of new methods and products on the production
laboratory, evaluation of laboratory capacities with regard to special
projects and newly developed products. She made recommendations
for product development and improvement to ensure that the laboratory
has the ability and flexibility to respond to client needs. She also
assisted the Sales and Marketing staff in matching product line elements
with client needs.
From 1984 to 1986 she was Manager Semi-Volatile Analyses. In this
position she was responsible for the management of the preparation and
analysis of each semi-volatile sample in a timely, accurate and cost
effective manner. A custom tracking system designed and implemented
by Ms. Ragsdale allowed this laboratory to systematically process
samples according to priority from assignment of GC/MS instruments
through the data review process.
From 1983 to 1984, Ms. Ragsdale managed the Sample Preparation
Laboratory. As Manager of this section she was responsible for the
accurate and timely preparation of each sample for analysis.
From 1980 to 1983, Ms. Ragsdale was responsible for the establish-
ment and management of the Quality Control Depanment As Manager
Quality Control she was responsible for ensurring that the quality of the
laboratory analyses performed and the data reported to clients were of
the best quality possible.
From 1979 to 1980, Ms. Ragsdale operated a variety of laboratory in-
struments, including GC/MS, AutoAnalyzer and gas and liquid chroma-
tographs in her position as Senior Chemist.
I
I
I
-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
'I
r •
Patty L. Ragsdale
Manager Quality Assurance
(continued)
Southern Analytical, Inc.
From 1978 to 1979, Ms. Ragsdale was employed by Southern Analyti-
cal Inc. She was involved in the sales and service of gas and liquid
chromatographic systems.
South Carolina Department of Health & Environmental Control
Columbia, South Carolina
From 1974 to 1978 Ms. Ragsdale was employed by the South Carolina
Department of Health and Environmental Services. As a Chemist I, she
served as a group leader for AutoAnalyzer analyses from 1974 to
1976. During that time she worked extensively on the development of
a quality assurance program for that laboratory and six regional labora-
tories. Following promotion to Chemist II, she served as group leader
of chromatographic analyses, reviewing all chromatograms and work
associated with GC and GC/MS analyses.
South Carolina Departtnent of Mental Health
Columbia, South Carolina
From 1973 to 1974 Ms. Ragsdale was employed by the South Carolina
Department of Mental Health as a Laboratory Specialist Her work
involved the separation of various drugs and their relative metabolites
from biological tissues and the quantitative analysis of the separated
compounds.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Responsibility:
Education:
Experience:
Toivo E. Niemi
Supervisor GC/MS and GC Department
Mr. Niemi is responsible for the timely, accurate and efficient analysis of
client samples by GC/MS. His duties include maintenance of the GC/MS
instrumentation, training of staff members and evaluation of generated
sample data. In addition to his production responsibilities, Mr. Niemi is
responsible for the administration of the quality control requirements defined
for the GC/MS analyses.
As supervisor of the GC department, Mr. Niemi is responsible for the
timely, accurate and efficient analysis of clients samples for organic content
by GC. He is responsible for sample analysis scheduling, review of the data
generated, development of new analytical methods and training of staff
members. In addition to his production responsibilities, Mr. Niemi is
responsible for the administration of the quality control requirements which
have been defined for GC analyses.
Mr. Niemi received a B.A. degree in Chemistry from Cornell Uni-
versity. He received a M.S. degree in Environmental Chemistry
from the University of Virginia in 1985.
IE.A
From September 1984 to August 1985 Mr. Niemi was employed as
Staff Chemist In that capacity he was responsible for the operation
and maintenance of the GC and GC/MS instruments, review of the
generated data and the preparation of the data reports.
University of Virginia
Charlottesville, Virginia
From 1981 to 1984 Mr. Niemi was a Graduate Research Assistant His
responsibilities included the development of field and laboratory
methods. This work was pursuant to his advanced degree in Environ-
mental Chemistry.
From May 1979 to August 1979, Mr. Niemi was a Technical Assistant
for Dr. Fred W. McLafferty. His responsibilities included calibration
and operation of an experimental MS/MS instrument designed
specifically for research.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-1
I
:1
I
C I
I
I
Publications:
Toivo E. Niemi
Supervisor GC/MS and GC Department
(continued)
McLafferty, Fred W., Peter J. Todd, Donald G. McGilvery, Michael
A. Baldwin, Frank M. Brockhoff, Gregory J. Wendel, Michael R.
Wixom and Toivo E. Niemi. "MS/MS: A New Separation/Identi-
fication Technique for Complex Organic Mixtures." Advances in Mm
Specn:omerzy. 8B, 1589-96.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Responsibility:
Education:
Experience:
Publications:
Lee Helms
CLP Project Manager
Mr. Helms is responsible for overseeing the analysis of samples
received from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency for the
Contract Laboratory Program. He is rsponsible for the administration
of the requirements of the CLP contract within the various laboratory
departments. He is also responsible for the generation of the final data
repon and the technical review of that repon.
Mr. Helms received a B.S. degree in Chemistry from San Diego State
University in San Diego, California in 1978.
S-Cubed
San Diego, California
From 1985 to 1987 Mr. Helms was employed as Project Manager.
In that capacity he was responsible for the analysis of environmental
samples using the Isotope Dilution GC/MS methodologies. He was
also responsible for the evaluation of the analytical data generated and
for the preparation of the final data repons.
From 1979 to 1985 Mr. Helms was employed as a GC/MS Operator.
In that capacity he was responsible for the analysis of water and soil
samples for priority pollutants by GC/MS.
From 1978 to 1979 Mr. Helms was employed as a Pesticide Residue
Analysts. He was responsible for the analysis of water and soil
samples for pesticide content by GC/ECD. He was also responsible for
the evaluation of the data obtained from the analysis. Concurrently, he
preferred routine extractions on HC and soil samples for GC and
GC/MS analyses.
Deve)opment a! llll Isorope Pi!urion GC/MS Method for Pesticides,
(with R. Beimer), submitted to USEPA, February 1986.
Development a! an Isotope Dilution GC/MS Method fcx Hot~ Jllld Iw1 .llll1 Tou2 YoJariJe AnaJysjs, (with R. Beimer), submitted
to USEPA, June 1986.
AnaJysjs a! Extracrib)e Organic Pollutant Standards by Isotope GC/MS,
(with R. Beimer), submitted to USEPA, July 1986.
I
I
I ~•
I
:1
I
I
I
I
I
I
:I
I
1
I
(.
I
I
I
Responsibility:
Education:
Experience:
Juliana K. Niemi .
Customer Service Coordinator
Ms. Niemi is responsible for the final technical review of data repons
and for issuing release approval for those repons. Her technical
review encompasses all elements of the analytical process affecting
the integrity of the data repons from sample receipt and log-in to the
analysis and the final typing of the repon. In addition to the technical
review function, Ms. Niemi provides technical assistance to clients and
to the laboratory staff in the selection of analytical methods for unusual
or difficult sample matrices. Ms. Niemi coordinates functions between the
shipping and receiving supervisor, the customer service representative and
customer service assistant
Ms. Niemi received a B.S. degree in F1oriculture/Horticulture in 1983
from North Carolina State University in Raleigh, North Carolina. She
has continued her education in chemistry at the University of North
Carolina at Chapel Hill.
IEA
From June 1987 to September 1987 Ms. Niemi reviewed data produced
by the GC Department During that time she also assisted in the im-
plementation of more complete documentation of the quality control
program within the laboratory.
From September 1985 to June 1987 Ms. Niemi was employed as a
GC/MS operator. In that capacity she operated 2 GC/MS instruments,
reviewed data produced within the GCJMS laboratory for accuracy
and viability, prepared laboratory data reports and assisted in the
training of six (6) other GCJMS operators. She also served as the
Second Shift Supervisor from March 1986 until February 1987.
From March 1985 to September 1985 Ms. Niemi perl'ormed metals
analyses by atomic absorption, TOX analyses, ion chromatography,
and organic analyses using infrared spectroscopy and HPLC. She also
assisted with bacteriological analyses, extractions, and the classical
wet chemistry analyses on an as needed basis.
From October 1984 to March 1985 Ms. Niemi was primarily responsible
for bacteriological analyses, TOX and the analysis of certain inorganic
components using selective ion electrodes.
From June 1984 to October 1984 Ms. Niellll was employed as an
Extractionist. In that capacity she was responsible for the preparation
of liquid and solid samples for analysis of pesticides, herbicides,
base-neutral and acid extractable compounds by GC and GCJMS.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l-1
Juliana K. Niemi
Customer Service Coordinator
(continued)
Nonh Carolina State University
Raleigh, Nonh Carolina
From September 1982 to April 1984 Ms. Niemi was employed as a
Laboratory Technician working on a research project funded by the
U.S. Depamnent of Agriculture. She analyzed sweet potatoes for
total Kjeldahl nitrogen, metals and mineral content as pan of the
research project
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Responsibility:
Education:
Experience:
Edgar E. Folk IV
Technical Officer
As Technical Officer for IEA, Mr. Folk is responsible for troubleshooting
instrumentation and methodology to promote efficient sample analysis. He
is also responsible for method development and the refinement of current
instrumentation and methodology. In addition to his technical duties, Mr.
Folk is responsible for personnel training of new products.
Mr. Folk received a B.A. degree in Chemistry from Wake Forest
University in Winston-Salem, North Carolina in 1981.
IEA
From August 1985 to September 1988 Mr. Folk was employed as a GC
Chemist. He implemented the use of standard operating procedures
in the GC Laboratory and was responsible for the development,
validation and implementation of new methods and procedures
in the laboratory. He also was responsible for the routine analysis
of environmental samples for pesticide, herbicide, PCB, and volatile
content using gas chromatographic techniques and the evaluation of
the resulting data.
Grainger Laboratories, Inc.
Raleigh, North Carolina
From 1983 to 1985 Mr. Folk was employed as the GC Department
Supervisor. In that capacity he was responsible for the analysis of
environmental samples for pesticide, herbicide, PCB, and volatile
compounds.
Webb Food Lab, Inc.
Raleigh, North Carolina
From 1982 to 1983 Mr. Folk was employed as the GC Laboratory
Supervisor. In that capacity he was responsible for the development and
implementation of methods required by a contract with U.S. Department
of Agriculture for pesticide analyses.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
I
m
D
D
~m
I
:I
I
I
Edgar E. Folk IV
Technical Officer
(continued)
Nonh Carolina Deparnnent of Natural Resources and
-Community Development
Raleigh, Nonh Carolina
From 1981 to 1982 Mr. Folk was employed as a Chemist Analyst I.
He was responsible for the analysis of environmental samples for
pesticides, herbicides and priority pollutants by GC and GC/MS.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
D
m
Responsibility:
Education:
Experience:
Keith B. Scott
Assistant Supervisor GC Department
As assistant supervisor of the GC Laboratory, Mr. Scott is responsible
for assisting in the scheduling of sample analyses, review of data
generated, development of new analytical methods and training of staff
members. He is responsible for ensuring that each sample is screened/
analyzed within allowable timeframes. He is also responsible for
ensuring that the necessary extraction preparation information is pro-
vided to the Extractions Department in time for each extraction to be
performed with specified holding times.
Mr. Scott received a B.S. degree in Ecology from the University of
North Carolina in Wilmington, North Carolina in 1986.
IEA
From October 1986 to April 1987 Mr. Scott was employed as a GC
Analyst In that capacity he performed analyses of samples for
volatile organic, pesticide, herbicide, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB)
and fuel oil content using gas chromatographs.
From July 1986 to October 1986 he was employed as an Organic
Extractionist In that capacity he prepared water and solid samples for
analysis by GC, GCJMS and IR. Gel permeation chromatography was
employed as necessary to "clean up" the extracts of complex sample
matrices.
Institute of Marine Biomedical Research
Wilmington, North Carolina
From July 1985 to Spetember 1985 Mr. Scott was employed as a Labora-
tory Technician. In that capacity he performed experiments on the effects
of pressure and temperature on fresh water and marine fish.
North Carolina Marine Resources Center
Fort Fisher, North Carolina
From September 1983 to May 1984 Mr. Scott was employed as an
Aquariums Department Technician. He assisted in the maintenance of the
aquariums for fresh and saltwater organisms. His duties included
verification of pH, salinity, temperature and performing growth
studies.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
I
I
Darrell P. Johnson
Supervisor Inorganic Department
Responsibility::,i Mr. Johnson is responsible for the timely, accurate and efficient analysis
of client samples for inorganic content He is responsible for scheduling
the various sample analyses, reviewing the analytical results and train-
ing his staff. In addition to his production responsibilities, he is re-
sponsible for the administration of the quality control requirements de-
fined for the inorganic analyses.
Education: Mr. Johnson received a B.S. degree in Textile Chemistry in 1978 and
a second B.S. degree in Chemistry in 1987. Both degrees were
awarded by North Carolina State University in Raleigh, Nonh Carolina.
Experience: Cannon Mills
Kannapolis, North Carolina
From June 1978 to September 1985 Mr. Johnson was employed as
Technical Manager for Cannon Mill's Print Department In that
capacity he was responsible for the management of the laboratory
and the associated staff. He also was responsible for product develop-
ment and the investigation of production problems arrising from
technical difficulties.
Affiliations: American Chemical Society
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
,I
I
I
'
I l
Responsibility:
Education:
Experience:
Affiliations:
Darrell P. Johnson
Supervisor Sample Preparation Department
Mr. Johnson is responsible for supervising and performing extractions for
organic analysis according to EPA protocol. Supervision and performing
EP-Toxicity Leaching Procedure and TCLP procedures for all analysis
types.
Also responsible for maintaining work flow for extractions to ensure
protocol and to make sure that production deadlines are met
Must ensure that all quality control guidelines are strictly adhered to and
documented. ·
Must maintain a trained technical staff for the Sample Prep Depamnent
Mr. Johnson received a B.S. degree in Textile Chemistry in 1978 and a
second B.S. degree in Chemistry in 1987. Both degrees were awarded by
N.C. State University in Raleigh, NC
Cannon Mills
Kannapolis, NC
From June 1978 to September 1985, Mr. Johnson was employed as
Technical Manager for Cannon Mills' Print Department In that capacity he
was responsible for the management of the lab and the associated staff. He
also was responsible for product development and the investigation of
production problems arising from technical difficulties.
American Chemical Society
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
_I
'
I
rl
I
t
I ,-.
Responsibility:
Education:
Experience:
Alan T. Lynch
Supervisor Metals Department
As Metals Analysis Supervisor, Mr. Lynch is responsible for the timely,
accurate and efficient analysis of client samples for metals content. In
addition to production responsibilities, he is responsible for the
administration of the quality control requirements defined for the metals
department.
Master of Science -Analytical Chemistry -May of 1986
Minor -Chemical Oceanography
North Carolina State University, Raleigh, NC
GPA -3.0 / 4.0
B.A. -Marine Chemistry -May 1983
University of North Carolina at Wilmington
Wihnington, NC
GPA -3.3 / 4.0 Dean's Honor List
IEA -August 1988 -Present
Technology Applications, Inc. c/o EPA College Station Road
Athens, GA -Analytical Chemist -May 1986 to August 1988
Responsibilities:
-Managed laboratory that conducted experiments on the thermodynamic
and kinetic aspects of metal sorption and speciation on environmental
surfaces.
Developed and perfonned atomic spectrometry techniques for the
Chemical Research Division of the Athens EPA.
-Supervised 3 other laboratory employees
North Carolina State University-Department of Chemistry
September 1983 -May 1986
Teaching Assistant -Instructed senior level Quantitative Analysis and
General Chemistry Laboratories
General Electric -Nuclear Division
Wihnington, NC
Research Assistant
May 1983 -September 1983
Research in waste water treatment and analysis
(Summer employment -full time)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J c.
I
cl
I
I
.1
Areas of
Expertise:
Areas of
Experience:
Alan T. Lynch
Supervisor Metals Department
(continued)
Plasma, Flame, and Electrothermal atomic absorption and emission
spectrometry
UV-Vis and molecular absorption and emission spectrometry
Waste water analysis and treatment
GC, HPLC, NMR, electrochemical methods, computer interfacing, ion
chromatography, knowledge of neutron activation analysis, mass
spectrometry, isotopic dating and organic geochemistry
I
I .-
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
'
:I
I
:1
•
0. Facilities
IEA QA Manual
Section 0
Page 1 of 2
Date: August, 1988
IEA occupies a 15,300 square foot building of which approximately 70% is dedicated to the
analytical laboratories. Separate laboratory areas are dedicated to GC instrumentation, GC/MS
instrumentation, organic extractions, sample preparation for volatile analysis, metals analysis by
atomic absorption, metals analysis by inductively coupled plasma (ICP), standards preparation, and
preliminary sample screening.
The laboratory is divided into seven (7) temperature controlled zones. The heating and air condition
control for these areas is provided by 62 tons of heating/air conditioning equipment The overall
building air flow sweeps from its entry in the trace level GC and GC/MS laboratories through the
other analytical laboratories and exits the building in the extractions laboratory areas which arc at the
opposite end of the building.
The laboratory has eleven (11) fume hoods strategically located for a total of over 60 linear feet of
hood capacity. 110/220 volt circuits power the instrumentation. Critical instrumentation such as
GC/MS units, data systems and selected gas chromatographs arc equipped with unintcrruptable
power supplies (UPS). Other instruments, such as atomic absortion spectrometer, ICP and gas
chromatographs used for routine analyses arc protected with Topaz power conditioners.
A standard preparation area equipped with an enclosed negative pressure bio-hazard
hood with interlock is used for the preparation of standards from highly hazardous pure
compounds. Less hazardous standards and dilutions of prepared standards arc prepared in a
separate laboratory area.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IE.A QA Manual
Section 0
Page2of2
Date: August, 1988
Laboratory reagent water is produced by a Millipore reverse osmosis unit which feeds a 30 gallon
storage tank which in tum feeds a Barnstead deionized water system. A pair of 5 gallon tanks of
the resulting reagent grade water are heated and purged with nitrogen to generate the organic-free
reagent water required for the volatile analyses. Each 5 gallon tank is purged for a minimum of 24
hours and tested for volatile organic content prior to use. A second deionized water system capable
of producing 18 Megohm water provides cleaning and rinse water for the glassware preparation
area.
The glassware preparation area is equipped with a 24 cubic foot muffle furnace. All extraction and
sample preparation glassware is treated at 45{)<>C for 4 hours immediately prior to each usage.
Four locked commercial refrigerator units are used to house samples waiting for analysis. Twelve
locked laboratory refrigerators, located throughout the laboratory, are used to maintain sample
extracts or laboratory reagents. Each laboratory refrigerator is dedicated to sample (extract) storage
or reagent storage.
Access to the laboratory is carefully controlled through the use of key locked and combination
locked entry doors. All visitors are escorted while inside the building.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
m
D
•
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IEA QA Manual
Section P
Page 1 of 8
Date: August, 1988
P. Laboratory Equipment
Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry Instrumentation
2
1
1
Extrel EQL-400 MS equipped with
Hewlett Packard 5890
Hewlett Packard 7643A Auto Sampler
Pericom Montery MQ600 Terminal
160 Mb CDC Disk Drive
Cipher 9-track Magnetic Tape System
Finnigan OW A • 1020 equipped with
Tekmar LCS-2
Graph On GO-230 Terminal
CDC 32 Mb Disk Drive
WangCo 10 Mb Disk Drive
Perkin Elmer Mod 10 NRZI 9-track Magnetic Tape Transpon
Printronix P-300 Printer
Finnigan OWA • 1020 equipped with
Tekmar LCS-2
Tekmar Automatic Heated Sampler Module Model 4200
Graph On GO-230 Terminal
160 Mb CDC Disk Drive
CDC 32 Mb Disk Drive
WangCo 10 Mb Disk Drive
Perkin Elmer Mod 10 NRZI 9-track Magnetic Tape Transpon
Printronix P-300 Printer
1 Finnigan Stand Alone Data System equipped with ·
Data General NOV A 4C/5 Computer
CDC 32 Mb Disk Drive
Graph-On GC-230 Terminal
KeMedy 9600 9-track Magnetic Tape System
Printronix P-300 Printer
Total GC/MS Instrumentation:
4 GC/MS lnstnnnentation
1 Additional Stand Alone Data System
I
I
I
(I
I
:1
I
-1
D
m
ll
I
ti
I
1
I
1
I
(
I
Gas Chromatoi:raphy Instrumentatjon <Contjnued}
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hewlett Packard 5890 GC equipped with
2 Electron Capture Detectors
7673 Dual Tower Autosampler
Hewlett Packard 3392A Integrator
Hewlett Packard 3390A Integrator
Perkin Elmer Sigma 300 GCs equipped with
Photo Ionization Detector
Electrolytic Conductivity Detector
Tekmar LSC-2 Purge & Trap Unit
Tekmar ALS Auto Sampler
Spectro-Physics SP-4290 Integrator
Perkin Elmer Sigma 300 GCs equipped with
Photo Ionization Detector
Electrolytic Conductivity Detector
Tekmar LSC-2 Purge & Trap Unit
Spectro-Physics SP-4290 Integrator
Perkin Elmer Sigma 2 GC equipped with
Flame Ionization Detector
Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector
Tekmar LSC-2 Purge & Trap Unit
Tekmar ALS Auto Sampler
LCI-100 Integrator
Perkin Elmer Sigma 300 GC equipped with
Electron Capture Detector
Flame Photometric Detector
Perkin Elmer As-300 Auto Sampler
Spcctro-Physics SP-4290 Integrator
Tracor 540 GC equipped with
Electron Capture Detector
Flame Photometric Detector
Spcctro-Physics SP-4290 Integrator
Perkin Elmer Sigma 3B GC equipped with
Electron Capture Detector
Flame Ionization Detector
Spcctro-Physics SP-4290 Integrator.
IEA QA Manual
Section P
Page 2 of 8
Date: August, 1988
I
I
I
1
I
I 1
I
I 1
I 1
I
I 1
u
1
D
I 1
I
:I 1
I 1
:1
I
I
Perkin Elmer Sigma 1B GC equipped with
Electron Capture Detector
Connected to Sigma 15 Data System
Perkin Elmer Sigma 300 GC equipped with
2 Aame Ionization Detectors
Perkin Elmer AS-300 Auto Sampler
Connected to Sigma 15 Data System
Perkin Elmer Sigma 300 GC equipped with
2 Aame Ionization Detectors
Perkin Elmer AS-300 Auto Sampler
Tracor 540 GC equipped with
2 Aame Ionization Detectors
Dynatech Model 311 V Auto Sampler
Spectro-Physics SP-4290 Integrator
Tracor 540 GC equipped with
Aame Ionization Detector
Spectro-Physics SP-4290 Integrator
Perkin Elmer 910 GC equipped with
ThermaI Conductivity Detector
Shimadm CR3A Integrator
Perkin Elmer Sigma 1B GC equipped with
2 Aamc Ionization Detectors
Thermal Conductivity Detector
Spectro-Physics SP-4290 Integrator
Connected to Sigma 1B Data System
Spectro-Physics ChromStation Data System
Perkin Elmer Sigma Data Station
IE.A QA Manual
Section P
Page 3 of 8
Date: August, 1988
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-1
g
n
R
-.
m
I
1 Perkin Elmer Sigma 18 Data Station
IEA QA Manual
Section P
Page 4 of 8
Date : August, 1988
---------------------·--------
Total Gas Chromatography Instrumentation
14 GC Instruments
12 Integrators
3 Stand Alone Data Systems
I
I
I
:I
I
ll
I
(I
I
t
D
l. I
I
(I
I
t
I
I
I
I
lEA QA Plan
Section P
Page 5 of 8
Date: August, 1988
Atomic Absorptjon/ICP Instrumentation
1
2
1
Perkin Elmer Plasma II Inductively Coupled Argon
Plasma Emission Spectrometer equipped with
Perkin Elmer Model 7500 Computer System Controller
Perkin Elmer PR-210 Color Printer
Leybold Heraus Rotory Vacuum Pump
Perkin Elmer Model S000 Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer
Atomic Spectroscopy Data System 10
PR-100 Printer
AS-40 Autosampler
Graphite Furnace
AS-50 Autosampler
EDL Power Supply
Automatic Burner Control
HGA-500 Programmer
Perkin Elmer Zeeman/3030 Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer
EDL Power Supply
HGA-600 Power Unit
PR-100 Printer
AS-60 Autosampler
-----------·----------·--
Total Atomic Absorption/ICP Instrumentation
3 Atomic Absorption Instruments
1 Inductively Coupled Argon Plasma Instrument
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
n
I
I
I
J
I
t
I
( I
I
(
I
Elemental Analysis Instrumentation
I Kevex 8000 Elemental X-Ray Analyzer
IEAQAP!an
Section P
Page 6 of 8
Date: August, 1988
I JOEL Model 35C Scanning Electron Microscope with 3-Axis
Automated Image Analyzer
I JSM-840A Scanning Electron Microscope
Total Elemental Analysis Equipment
I
2
Elemental X-Ray Analyzer
Scanning Electron Microscopes
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
I
I
I
:B
D
11
I
1
I
I
IEA QA Manual
Section P
Page 7 of 8
Date: August, 1988
Miscellaneous Laboratory Equipment
1 Milton Roy Spectronic 1201 Spectrometer
2 Xertex Dohrman TOC Analyzer with Sample Conditioning Module
3
4
5
6
Dohrman Envirotech TOX Analyzer
Waters Lambda Max Model 481 LC Spectrometer Model 510 Solvent
Delivery System Differential Refractometer
IEC HN-SII Centrifuge
Tekmar Sonic Disrupter (For Sample Preparation)
7 Perkin Elmer No. 1430 Ratio Recording Infrared Spectrometer
8
9
10
11
Bughi Rotovapor Rll0
Bausch & Lomb Spectronic 21 Spectrometer
YSI Model 32 Conductance Meter
Fisher Model 447 Coulomatic K-F Titrimeter
12 Fisher Model 2200 Analytical Balance
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Fisher XT Analytical Balance
Two Fisher Model 805 MP pH/Mv Meter
Fisher Model 825 MP pH/Mv Meter
ABC Laboratories Gel Permeations Chromatography.
Fisher ISOTEMP 200 Series 255G Oven
Fisher ISOTEMP 200 Series Oven
Fisher ISOTEMP 300 Series Oven Fisher
ISOTEMP 230F Oven
20 Fisher ISOTEMP 501 Oven
21
22
Market Forge Sterilmatic Autoclave
Millipore/Barnstead 18 Megohm RO/DI Water System
' '
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(.
I
I (
I
23 Labconco Protector 4 Ft. Fume Hood
24 Labconco Protector 6 Ft. Fume Hood
IEA QA Manual
Section P
Page 8 of 8
Date: August, 1988
2 5 Labconco Protector 5 Ft. Fume Hood with outside air make-up
26 Labconco 4 Ft. Glove Box
2 7 Fisher 5 Ft. Fume Hood with outside air make-up
28 Fisher 6 Ft. Fume Hoods withoutside air make-up
2 9 Perlick Stainless Three Door Commercial Cooler
30 Howard Stainless Three Door Commercial Cooler
31 Howard Stainless Single Door Commercial Cooler
3 2 Three Single Door Laboratory Refrigerators
33 Eight Single Door Laboratory Refrigerators
3 4 Four Topaz Power Conditioners
35 Three Uninterruptible Power Supplies for GC/MS
Systems (49 KV a Total)
3 6 Cannon NP-8570 High Speed Copier
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
n
D
-I
I
~1
I
·1
I
I
Q. Chemicals and Reagents
IEA QA Manual
Section Q
Page 1 of2
Date: August, 1988
The chemicals and reagents used by IEA are selected with extreme care. Solvents, chemicals and
analytical standards are purchased in large quantities to minimize the number of reagent lots.
Reagent lot numbers are recorded for every analytical batch processed.
"Analytical reagent grade" is the minimum quality used within the IEA laboratory. Ultra pure acids
are employed for low detection _limit metals analyses. Pesticide grade solvents are used for all
organic extractions.
Each new lot solvent is tested prior to acceptance for use in sample analysis. The extraction
solvents are concentrated to duplicate the concentration employed by the extraction process and
analyzed. Solvents used for the analysis of volatiles are analyzed using the same solvent volume
and analytical technique used for samples. The acceptance criteria for new solvent lots are:
1. No analyte present at concentrations equal to or greater than one-half the reported
quantitation limit
2. No non-analyte peak present in the test chromatogram which is greater than 10%
of the closest internal standard for GC/MS analyses or which would interfere in
the identification and quantitation process for GC analyses.
Each lot of acid is tested prior to acceptance for use in sample analysis. A blank water sample is
prepared for analysis using the new acid lot in the same manner used for sample analyses. For
acceptance, a new acid lot must be proved to be free of all analytes at the reponed quantitation limit
I
I
I
I
I -.
I
u
JI
I
t
I
1
IEA QA Manual
Section Q
Page2of2
Date: August, 1988
Records showing the exact reagent lots employed are maintained for all . analyses. The method
blanks prepared for each set of samples serve as continual verification of the quality of the reagents
as well as the quality of the total analytical environmental.
All analytical standards are traceable to EPA certified standards. Each new lot of analytical
standards is analyzed versus a corresponding standard obtained from the EPA. Both standards
must be within 20% of each other for the new analytical standard to be accepted for use by the
laboratory. Relative response of the analytes in the standards is monitored by the production staff
and by the QA Officer to ensure that the integrity of each analytical standard is maintained.
-. I j · ..
I \J ·.
./
I
I QUALITY ASSURANCE MD
.. © I and ~
I MD
c::::::J
I QUALITY CONTROL ©
-(!/j1) I D
I ~
~
I c::::::J
@£
I MD
MD I ~
I c::::::J
~ : -~
[1ill] -u; ' u
1 ENGINEERING-SCIENCE w • I LABORATORIES
r. .
' AUGUST 1988 I ' I
I
Engineering-Science
Laboratories
Quality Assurance
and
Quality Control
SECTION 1
SECTION 2
SECTION 3
SECTION 4
SECTION 5
SECTION 6
SECTION 7
SECTION 8
SECTION 9
SECTION 10
SECTION 11
155E/19/R2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
LIST OF FIGURES iii
LIST OF TABLES iii
QUALITY ASSSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL 1-1
STATEMENT OF POLICY
MANAGEMENT ORGANIZATION 2-1
PERSONNEL TRAINING 3-1
SAMPLE HANDLING 4-1
ANALYTICAL STANDARDS AND REAGENTS 5-1
Inorganic Parameters 5-1
Metals 5-2
organic Compounds 5-2
FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT 6-1
INSTRUMENT REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE 7-1
ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES 8-1
-CALIBRATION 9-1
Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy -Furnace Analysis 9-1
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy (ICP) 9-2
Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry 9-3
Gas Chromatography 9-5
LIMITS OF DETECTION/QUANTITATION 10-1
ANALYSIS OF QC SAMPLES AND DOCUMENTATION 11-1
Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry 11-1
Gas Chromatography 11-5
Metals Analyses 11 -6
Inorganic Anions Analyses 11-7
i
8/18/88
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Continued)
SECTION 12 CORRECTIVE ACTION
SECTION 13 DATA EVALUATION
APPENDIX A REQUIRED CONTAINERS, PRESERVATION TECHNIQUES,
AND HOLDING TIMES
ii
155E/19/R2
Page
12-1
13-1
8/18/88
I
3. 1
4. 1
4.2
4.3
4.4
9. 1
9.2
11 • 1
11 • 2
11 • 3
11.4
155E/19/R2
LIST OF FIGURES
Personnel Training Record
Chain-of-Custody
Bottle Label
Laboratory Sample Label
Sample Storage Log
LIST OF TABLES
Volatile Organic GC/MS TUning and Mass
Celibration -Bromofluorobenzene (BFB)
Semivolatile organic GC/MS TUning and Mass
Celibration -Decafluorotriphenylphosphine (DFTPP)
Volatiles Matrix Spike Recovery Limits
Semivolatile Matrix Spike Recovery Limits
Volatile Surrogate Spike Recovery Limits
Semivolatile Surrogate Spike Recovery Limits
iii
Page
3-3
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-6
Page
9-4
9-4
11-3
11-3
11-4
11-4
B/18/88
SECTION 1
QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
STATEMENT OF POLICY
The Engineering-Science Quality Assurance Policy Manual defines
"quality" as:
The individual and cumulative characteristics of a product
that meet acceptable performance standards and criteria
established by the Project Manager and Technical Director
prior to initiating substantive project activities. The
specific performance standards and criteria are established
independently for each project based on the project• s unique
goals, needs, and constraints, and on ES' commitment to
service and technical excellence.
This ES Laboratory Operations Quality Assurance/Quality Control
Manual provides a description of the procedures and protocols used to
ensure the results of chemical analyses are of known and documented
quality, consistent with the standards of the discipline and corporate
policy.
Quality Assurance is defined as the process of confirmation of the
accuracy of the work product. Thus it includes all activities used to
ensure the accuracy, precision, completeness, and representativeness of
the analysis results.
Quality Control includes the actions taken to obtain the data
required to assess the quality of the work, including analyses of QC
samples. These consist of laboratory control samples containing the
analyte(s) of interest in known amounts; blanks which are prepared in a
manner to represent total absence of the analyte; replicate determina-
tions of identical samples prepared in the same manner; and matrix
spiked eamples. Additional method-specific QC analyses may be required.
1-1
1 SSE/2 7/13/88
SECTION 2
MANAGEMENT ORGANIZATION
The Quality Assurance management for laboratory operations is
incorporated into the ES structure through the Engineering Direction
(ED) staff headed by a vice president of the company. The Manager of
Engineering Direction has the authority and responsibility to establish
and implement quality assurance programs for ES and the authority to
resolve conflicts in matters affecting quality of a project when the
matters cannot be resolved between the Quality Assurance Manager and
other ES managers.
Each technical area within ES is represented on the ED staff by a
Technical Manager. The Technical Manager reports functionally to the
Manager of Engineering Direction; is responsible for a specific techni-
cal area on a companywide basis; and is both a technical resource to a
project as well as responsible for assuring the technical adequacy of
all projects within that specific area. The Technical Manager normally
serves as the Quality Assurance Manager or may delegate this function,
as well as the technical responsibility for projects within the Techni-
cal Manager•~ area of expertise. The Technical Manager is also respon-
sible for approving the selection of a Technical Director for a project.
The Quality Assurance Manager reports functionally to the Manager
of ED and is responsible for reviewing and approving the QA plan for the
project. The Quality Assurance manager for a project will be respon-
sible to audit the quality assurance plan to ensure that appropriate
quality control measures are being followed.
The Technical Director works with the Project Manager and derives
authority over the technical issues of a project from the Technical
2-1
155E/3 7/13/88
I
i
I
ENGINEERING-SCIENCE, INC.
BK B8081927·
LOCATlON: D
WORK ORDEF::
TASKS: 4
BK 88081928·
LOCATION: D
WOF:K ORDER:
TASKS:
IDENTITY: ANCILLARY
WELL II 8·17·88
871 JDB:0000000283 CUSTDNER: 22
IDENTITY: ANCILLARY
WELL 12
871 JDB:0000000283 CUSTDNER: 22
The ES computerized laboratory management system (LMS) is used for
logging samples into the laboratory, tracking the progress of the
analyses, and preparation of the analysis report. Al.l information
pertinent to the identification of the sample and analyses to be per-
formed is entered into the LMS. Each sample is assigned a unique
laboratory number. Samples provided in multiple containers for differ-
ent tests are identified by the same laboratory number followed by a
hyphenated numeral identifying each fraction. A laboratory sample label
(Figure 4. 3) is attached to each bottle.· A work order is prepared and
provided to the Laboratory Supervisor for scheduling tests in accordance
with method required maximum holding times and/or client requested
response time. A bench sheet is printed and used by the analysts to
determine the tests required_for each sample/sample split, and serve as
the instrument of information transmittal throughout the salll?le prepara-
tion, analysis, and report preparation sequence. A copy of the sample
preparation log book page accompanies the bench sheet to communicate
information required for subsequent phases of the analytical process.
Samples are stored in designated refrigerated areas according to
the analyses to be performed. Sample splits to be analyzed for volatile
organic compounds are stored in a refrigerator dedicated for that
purpose only.
A sample storage log book is used for documentation of removal and
replacement of a sample from the secure storage area. An example page
of this record is shown in Figure 4.4.
4-5
155E/5 8/18/88
.m SAMPLE LOCATION INDEX
~ Sample Location Date Time Time I Analyst Notes
I. Out In
i. I
I
~l
1: . l i .•
Ii f I • • I ,i
. .
~l
' ,1
' ~:
~l
,1
. l ,,i
. I
~-·
,:
' ~.
I ' ' . I
I
I 88-Al-AAAAnnnn 1 ST-FRM02
I .
I
SECTION 5
ANALYTICAL STANDARDS AND R£AGENTS
The accuracy of a chemical analysis is dependent upon the quality
of reference standards and reagents used during the preparation and
analysis of the sample. Specific requirements for individual tests are
described in the method and swnmarized according to test methods in the
following subsections.
The purity of reagents must be analytical reagent grade as a
minimum. Reagent and method blanks are prepared and analyzed with each
sample set to ensure the purity of the materials and.solutions used in
preparation of the samples. Commercially obtained primary standards are
used for tests which they are applicable (e.g. organic analysis by GC or
GC/MS and metals by atomic spectroscopy). These standards are EPA or
NBS traceable, or compared to standards obtained from the EPA reposi-
tory.
Analysis standards prepared from stock solutions are stored in
containers consistent with their stability. These are labeled with the
standard number, date of preparation, concentration of analyte( s) and
the analyst's initials. The procedure used for preparation of the
standard, weights, volumes, dilutions and source of the stock solution
or chemical reagent including supplier and lot number is documented in
the standards log book maintained for each type of analysis method.
INORGANIC PARAMETERS
The tests performed for inorganic veter quality parameters are
defined for the purposes of this document as those described in "Methods
for Chemical Analysis of Water and wastes,• EPA 600/4-79-020, revised
5-1
15SE/6 8/18/88
I
I
I
I
March 1983; "Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Wastes,• EPA SW-846, 3rd
Ed., 1986; or "Standard Methods for Analysis of Water and Wastewater,"
16th Ed., 1985."
Analytical reagent grade chemicals are used for the preparation of
all standards, reagents and solvents. Salts which are thermally stable
are dried at 103 -105°C and cooled in a dessicator prior to being used
for the preparation of primary standard stock solutions. Quantitative
dilution of the standard stock solution is u,11ed for preparation of
analysis standards and spiking solutions. Standards prepared from
concentrated acids, thermally unstable salts or hydroscopic salts are
standardized against primary standards prior to being used for analysis
of samples, The frequen~y of preparation of standards and reagents is
as specified for each test method. All reagents and standards are
prepared in deionized water, unless distilled water is specified in the
test procedure.
METALS
Stock standard solutions of individual metals are acquired from
commercial suppliers. Certified solutions which are USEPA or NBS
traceable are obtained if available. Volumetric dilution of the stock
solution with deionized water and acid(s), which replicates the acid
content of the sample digestates, is used for the preparation of cali-
bration standards. The deionized water quality is checke& weekely. A
mid-range standard is prepared from a source different than' used for
preparation .of the calibration standards. This check standard is used
to verify the initial and continuing·· calibration of the instrument.
Matrix check samples of soil and sediment are obtained, when available,
from the National Bureau of Standarde or the EPA. These are analyzed
with samples of similar matrix -to detect potential errors in the prepa-
ration and analyses of samples.
Fuel and oxidant gases used for atomic spectroscopy are reagent
grade.
5-2
155E/6 8/18/88
i I I ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
Standard stock solutions for the analysis of organic compounds by
gas chromatography (GC) or gas chromatography/mass spectrometry (GC/MS)
are obtained from commercial sources. calibration standards ere pre-
pared by dilution with the analytical reagent grade solvent (or pesti-
cide grade if required) specified by the test method.
Standards for volatile organic analyses are prepared from •neat•
materials or stock solutions by addition of a known volume of standard
to a 10 mL volumetric flask containing 9.8 mL of solvent. The syringe
needle is held immediately above the surface of the solvent. The
standard must fall directly into the solvent without touching the flask
or the mixture is discarded. The flask, solvent and standard are
reweighed to determine the amoung of standard stock solution or neat
sample transferred. The mixture is then carefully diluted to volume
with solvent and slowly inverted several times to mix.
Standards are prepared from gases (Boiling point <30°C) by filling
a 5 mL gas tight syringe with standard to the 5.0 mL mark. The syringe
is lowered to within 5 mm of the surface of the solvent in a tared 10 mL
volumetric flask containing 9.8 mL of solvent. The reference gas is
slowly introduced above the surface of the solvent. The flask is
stoppered end reweighed. The mixture is carefully diluted to volume
with solvent, stoppered and mixed by inverting several times.
Standard solutions are transferred to a 1 O mL teflon-lined screw-
cap volatile glass bottle and stored at -10'C to -20°C in the volatile
standards freezer. Standards of gases are prepared fresh within one
week prior to use. All other standards for volatiles analyses are
prepared monthly or more often if a problem is detected by comparison
with check standards.
Certified stock solutions of semivolatile organic compounds are
obtained commercially. Celibration standards ere prepared by addition
of known volumes of stock.solution(s) to a volumetric flask containing
solvent and dilution to volume. Celibration standards are prepared at
three or five concentrations as required for the test method to be used.
5-3
155E/6 8/18/88
I.
! '
;
I
One standard is prepared near but about the method detection limit and
others bracket the concentration range of the analytes in the sample.
The calibration standards are transferred to an glass vial with
teflon-lined lid and stored in the semivolatile standards refrigerator
at 4°C. Standards are prepared each six months or more· frequently if
evidence of degration or comparison with check standards indicate a
potential problem.
Analytical reagent grade (or pesticides grade if required) solvents
are used for extraction of samples. Each lot of solvents obtained from
the supplier is screened by GC prior to use. If impurities are present
which will significantly impact the quality of the analyses, the remain-
ing bottles of the same lot are returned for exchange for a different
lot of the same solvent.
Reagent blanks are prepared and analyzed with each set of samples
to ensure the continued integrity of the solvents.
A standards preparation log book •is used to document the source of
the standards, method of preparation and date prepared. A standard
solution number is used to identify the sample and provide traceability
to the preparation log book.
5-4
155E/6 8/18/88
I
I
SECTION 6
FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT
The laboratory facility is designed to minimize the potential for
sample contamination. Particular attention has been given to segrega-
tion of activities which utilize volatile solvents from the areas in
which storage and analyses of samples for these compounds occurs.
Chemical fume hoods are used during performance of procedures which may
result in the emission of vapors.
Instruments used for the determination of organic .compounds and
metals are located in areas which are protected by separation from the
laboratories in which organic or acidic vapors may be present. Analy-
tical balances are located in a draft free room which can be maintained
at a near constant temperature.
Glassware is assigned to a specific area to minimize the potential
for contamiantion due to reagents, solvents or cleaning procedures. An
area dedicated to glassware preparation is centrally located.
An area for sample receipt and log-in is located near the receiving
entrance of the laboratory. The computerized LMS is located in this
room to ~cilitate sample logging and date management.
Instrumentation used for the determination of organic compounds by
gas chromatography end gas chromatography/mass spectrometry is housed in
an area equipped with computer terminals readily available for reduction
of raw data, interpretation of chromatograms and spectre, calculation of
concentrations and automated transfer of this information to the analy-
ais report. Computerized data acquisition, reduction and transfer of
information from analyses performed by inductively coupled plasma and
atomic absorption spectroscopy provides timely access to QC results end
verification of the analysis data.
6-1
155E/7 7/13/88
I
~
I I .
I .
u ' .
' I I
SECTION 7
INSTRUMENT REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
Analytical instruments are serviced at intervals recommended by the
manufacturer. Service contracts for regular maintenance and emergency
service are maintained for major instruments. An instrument repair
maintenance log book is kept for each instrument. Entries include the
date of service, type of problem encountered, corrective action taken,
and initials of the person verifying the service has been satisfactorily
performed.
The instrument use log book is monitored by the analysts to detect
any degradation of instrument performance. Changes-in response factors
or sensitivity are used as indicators of potential problems. These are
brought to the attention of the laboratory supervisor and preventative
maintenance or service is scheduled to minimize downtime. Back-up
instrumentation and an inventory of critical spare parts are maintained
to minimize delays in completion of analyses.
7-1
155E/8 7/13/88
l
D
SECTION 8
ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES
Analysis methods and procedures recommended by the USEPA are used
for analyses unless project requirements specify a method of choice.
Comparability of the analysis results to those obtained by other labor-
atories or subsequent projects is optimized by the selection of analy-
tical methods described in the following publications:
•
•
•
•
•
Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Wastes, USEPA, SW-846, 3rd
Edition, 1986.
Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, USEPA-600/
4-79-020, Revised March 1983.
Methods for Organic Chemical Analysis of Municipal and
Industrial Wastewater, USEPA-600/4-82-057, Revised October 26,
1984, CFR Vol. 49, No. 209.
USEPA contract Laboratory Statement of work, issued and revised
in the form of an Invitation for Bid on a periodic schedule.
Standard Methods for Analysis of Water and Waste Water, 16th
Ed.-, 1985.
The methods selected for a specific project are based upon discus-
sions with the client to ensure the work product will provide the
information desired with an appropriate level of QC documentation.
8-1
155E/9 7/13/88
.1
I
I.
I i
n
I
I
' I
SECTION 9
CALIBRATION
The calibration procedures, frequency of initial and continuing
calibration verification, and criteria for evaluation of the calibration
data are applied as described in the analysis methods. calibration data
is recorded in the instrument use log book and referenced to the stan-
dards preparation log to identify the source and method of preparation
of the standard solutions used. The procedures for calibration of major
instrumentation used by the laboratory are described in the following
subsections.
ATOMIC ABSORPTION SPECTROSCOPY -FURNACE ANALYSIS
Standards used for calibration of the instrument are prepared fresh
each time an analysis is run and discarded after use. The calibration
solutions consist of a blank and a minimum of three analytical standards
bracketing the analytical range of the instrument. One of the standards
must be ~ 2X the quantit.ation limit for the metal. The calibration
standards are diluted with deionized water containing the same concen-
tration(s) ~f acid(s) as the sample digestates.
A solution obtained from the EPA or prepared from a source inde-
pendent from that used for the initial calibration is prepared at a
concentration known by the analyst to optimize the probability of
reproducability and accuracy. This solution is identified as the
initial calibration verification ( ICV) or continuing calibration veri-
fication (CCV) solution depending upon its use.
The instrument is calibrated each day and/or each ·time the instru-
ment is set up. Each solution is measured in duplicate. The analytical
9-1
155E/10 7/13/88
I
I i
I
i
I
blank is analyzed, followed by the analytical standards in the order of
increasing concentration.
The accuracy of the initial calibration is verified by the analysis
of the ICV standard. The value obtained for the concentration of the
ICV based upon the calibration plot ·must agree wii:h the true value
within 90 to 110 percent. If the concentration is not within this
acceptance range, during initial or continuing calibration verification,
the problem is corrected, the instrument recalibrated, and the calibra-
tion verified.
The analytical blank must be reanalyzed immediately after the ICV
and each CCV. This blank must be analyzed at a frequency of 10 percent
counting duplicate measurements for each sample as one. The CCV and
analytical blank are .!!.21 counted in determining the 10 percent fre-
quency.
INDUCTIVELY COUPLED PLASMA EMISSION SPECTROSCOPY (ICP)
The standards used for initial calibration of the instrument are
obtained commercially. Only stock standard solutions prepared for ICP
are useda
An analytical blank and three initial calibration solutions are
used to establish the calibration curve for each analyte. The concen-
trations of each analyte is graduated over a range appropriate for the
metal.
The calibration solutions are prepared fresh and discarded after
use. The stock solution used is ·clearly referenced in the Standards
Preparation Log Book. Each entry shows the volume of stock solution
used, final dilution volume, concentrations of the analytes in the
standard, date of preparation, and the analyst's initials.
The instrument is calibrated daily or each time it is set up. A
minimum of two trials must be run for each analytical solution. The
mean of the measurements is used to determine the intensity obtained.
Immediately following completion of the initial calibration, an
initial calibration verification solution is analyzed. This solution is
prepared from stock solution( s l of a different source than used for
9-2
155E/10 7/13/88
preparation of the initial calibration standards, and contains all
analytes to be determined. Measurements are obtained at each of the
wavelengths used for the analyses of samples.
The concentration calculated from the calibration curve must agree
with the known concentration for each element within i_10 percent, ·or the
instrument is recalibrated for the element(s) that do not meet this
criteria.
Immediately following the ICV determination, the analysis blank is
reanalyzed. This blank is measured at each wavelength to be used for
sample analysis. It is analyzed at a frequency of 10 percent, imme-
diately following each CCV analysis. The analysis blank and the CCV
standard are not counted in determining the 10 percent frequency.
The acceptance criteria for the analysis blank is:
If the concentration of any analyte in the blank is > the
quantitation limit, correct the problem and reanalyze all
samples analyzed since the last acceptable blank analysis.
The quantitation limit standard is used to verify the accuracy of
the calibration curve at concentrations at the low end of the analytical
range. This standard contains all analytes (except Al, Ba, ca, Fe, Mg,
Na, and Kl at concentrations of 2 times the quantitation limit. This
solution is analyzed at the beginning of each run and at the end, or
every 8 hours whichever is more frequent.
GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
Each instrument is tuned prior to initial calibration. The tuning
compounds bromofluorobenzene (BFB) used for volatiles analyses and
difluorodiphenylphosphine (DFTPP) for semivolatiles must meet the
criteria as shown in Tables 9-1 and 9-2.
The initial instrument calibration is obtained using five calibra-
tion standards at concentrations specified by EPA Methods 8240 and 8270,
or EPA 624 CLP-Mand EPA 625 CLP-M. The calibration standards contain
the target compounds and internal standards. The average relative
response factor (RRF) for each compound is calculated using the analyte/
internal standard eets specified in the methods. The acceptance cri-
teria for the relative standard deviation of the RRFs for calibration
9-3
lSSE/10 8/18/88
TABLE 9-1
VOLATILE ORGANIC GC/MS TUNING AND MASS
CALIBRATION -BROMOFLUOROBENZENE (BFB)
m/e
so
75
Ion Abundance Criteria
15.0 -40.0\ of mass 95
30.0 -60.0\ of mass 95
95 Base peak, 100\ relative abundance
96 5.0 -9.o, of mass 95
173 Less than 2.0, of mass 174
174 Greater than 50.0\ of mass 95
175 5.0 -9.o, of mass 174
176 Greater than 95.0\, but less than 101.0\ of mass 174
177 5.0 -9.o, of mass 176
1 -value is percent mass 174
2 -value is percent mass 176
TABLE 9-2
m/e
51
68
69
70
127
197
198
199
275
365
SEMIVOLATILE ORG.ANIC GC/MS TUNING AND MASS
CALIBRATION -DECAFLUOROTRIPHENYLPHOSPHINE (DFTPP)
Ion Abundance Criteria
30.0 -60.0\ of mass 198
Less than 2.0\ of mass 69
Mass 69 relative abundance
Less than 2.0, of mass 69
40.0 -60.0\ of mass 198
Less than 1.0\ of mess 198
Base Peak, 100\ relative abundance
5.0 to 9.0\ of mass 198
10.0 -30.0\ of mass 198
Greater than 1.00\ of mass 198
441 Present, but less than mass 443
442 Greater than 40.0\ of mass 198
443 17.0 -23.0\ of mass 442
1 -value is percent mass 69
2 -value is percent mass 442
155E/10
9-4
Percent
Relative
Abundance
) 1
( ) 1
( ) 1
( ) 2
Percent
Relative
Abundance
) 1
) 1
)2
8/18/88
I
I
check compounds and minimum average RRFs for system performance check
compounds must achieved before sample analysis can begin.
The instrument tune and calibration are verified each 12 hours of
operation, or as specified by the method used. Acceptance criteria for
continuing calibration specified by the method are met prior to analysis
of samples.
GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
Instruments used for the determination of organic compounds by gas
chromatography may be calibrated by the external standard or internal
standard method. The procedures used for each method are described.
External Standard Calibration Procedure
For each analyte of interest, calibration standards at a minimum of
five concentrations are prepared by adding volumes of stock standards to
a volumetric flask and diluting to volume with an appropriate solvent.
One of the external standards should be at a concentration near, but
above, the method detection limit. The other concentrations should
correspond to the expected range of sample concentrations or should
define the working range of the detector.
Each calibration standard is analyzed using the technique that will
be used to introduce the actual samples into the gas chromatograph.
Peak height or area responses are tabulated against the mass injected.
The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for each analyte
or the ratio of the response to the amount introduced, calibration
factor (CF), can be calculated for each analyte at each standard concen-
tration. If the percent relative standard deviation (\RSD) of the
calibration factor is less than 20 percent over the working range,
linearity through the origin can be assumed, and the average calibration
factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
Calibration factor • Total Area of Peak•
·Mass Injected (in nanograms)
*For multiresponse pesticides/PCBs use the total area
of all peaks used for quantitation.
9-5
155E/10 8/18/88
I
The calibration curve or calibration factor must be verified each
day by the injection of one or more calibration standards. The fre-
quency of verification is dependent on the detector. If the response
for any analyte varies from the initial calibration by more than +15
percent, corrective action is taken which may include recalibration.
Internal Standard Calibration Procedure
To use this procedure, one or more internal standards that are
similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest are
selected. The analyst must demonstrate that the measurement of the
internal standard is not affected by method or matrix interferences.
Due to these limitations, no internal standard applicable to all samples
can be recommended.
Calibration standards at a minimum of five concentration levels for
each analyte of interest are prepared by adding volumes of one or more
stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration standard, a
known constant amount of one or more internal standards is added and
diluted to volume with an appropriate solvent.
One of the standards should be at a concentration near, but above,
the method detection limit. The other concentrations should correspond
to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should
define the working range of the detector.
Each calibration standard is injected using the same introduction
technique that will be applied to the actual samples. Peak height or
area responses are tabulated against the concentration of each compound
and internal standard.
calculated as follows:
Response factors (RF) for each compound are
RF• (A Ci )/(Ai C) S S 8 S
where:
A • Response for the analyte to be measured.
A8 • Response for the internal standard.
cis • concentration of the internal standard, ug/l..
cis • concentration of the analyte to be measured, ug/L. s
If the RF value over the working range is constant ( <20 percent RSD),
the RF is assumed to be invariant, and the average RF is used for
9-6
155E/10 8/18/88
I
,I
I .
,I
I
II
;I
JI
:1
• -~
I
calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a calibra-
tion curve of response ratios, As/Ais versus RF.
The working calibration curve or RF is verified on each working day
by the measurement of one or more calibration standards. The frequency
of verification is dependent upon the detector. If the response for any
analyte varies from the predicted response by more than +15 percent,
corrective action is taken which may include recalibration.
Retention Time
The retention time windows for each compound are established from
the initial and continuing calibration as described in the respective
methods.
9-7
155E/10 B/18/88
I
' I
SECTION 10
LIMITS OF DETECTION/QUANTITATION
The minimum quantity of substance that will create a detector
response that can be distinguished from background noise with 99 percent
confidence is used to define the detection limit for the substance. All
factors involved in the preparation of the sample and introduction into
the instrument must be considered in arriving at a numerical value for
this parameter.
The instrument detection limit ( IDL) is a measure of the sensi-
tivity of the detection device for the component of interest. It is the
primary factor influencing the relative values established for more
meaningful limits of detection for substances prepared and analyzed in
like manner. The most accurate method of expressing the IDL is in terms
of an absolute mass of the analyte, rather than in units of concentra-
tion.
The method detection limit -(MDL) is the minimum concentration of a
substance in a sample that can be distinguished from background with 99
percent confidence. The MDL is expressed in concentration units and is
calculated by conversion of the concentration of the analyte in the
solution introduced into the instrument to the concentration in the
original sample. All concentration/dilution factors and conversion to a
dry weight basis (solids) are included in the calculation of the MDL.
The practical quantitation limit (PQL), reporting limit, and
contract required quantitation limit (CRQL) are terms used to express
the lowest concentration of a substance that can be determined within
the accuracy and precision limits established for the method. Thia
value is based upon the MDL with allowance for the relative instrument
error inherent in· the analysis method. This is the lowest concentration
10-1
155E/11 7/13/88
I
I
I
I
that can be accurately determined. Concentrations lower than the
quanti tat ion limit but greater than the method detection limit are
reported as estimated values only. They may or may not meet the QC
acceptance criteria for the method.
10-2
155E/11 7/13/88
I
f
I
I
I
SECTION 11
ANALYSIS OF QC SAMPLES
AND DOCUMENTATION
Quality control samples are prepared by the laboratory and analyzed
with each set of environmental samples of similar matrix. A set is
defined as a group of samples, not to exceed twenty, which are prepared
and/or analyzed by the same procedure. The results of the QC analyses
are used to assess the precision and accuracy of the analytical results
obtained for the sample set. The type and frequency of QC sample
analyses are as described by the analytical methods. The normal labora-
tory procedures described herein are used as a minimum. Project spe-
cific requirements which are equivalent to or exceed these minimums are
used as applicable. Corrective actions taken as a result of QC analyses
results are documented in the instrument use log book.
GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
Blanks
Each set of samples analyzed for semivolatile organic compounds is
prepared with a method blank. This is a sample of similar matrix which
is processes! through all steps of the sample preparation in the same
• manner as the samples. The concentration of target compounds in the
method blank must be !_ the quantitation limit with the exception of
phthalate esters for which a concentration of five times the quantita-
tion limit is the control limit.
Analyzes for volatile organic compounds include a blank analysis of
the laboratory reagent water. The blank is analyzed vith each set of
samples or more often as required to prevent carryover between samples.
The concentration of target compounds in the blank must be!_ the quanti-
tation limit with the exception of a control limit of!_ Sx the quantita-
tion limit used for common laboratory solvents.
11-1
155E/15 8/18/88
I
I i
I
I
-I
' '
The blank samples analyzed by GC/MS methods are spiked with the
surrogate compounds and internal standards used for the sample analyses.
Matrix Spiked Samples
Each set of samples is analyzed with a matrix spiked sample and a
matrix spike duplicate. The spiking compounds and control limits for
percentage recovery (\R) and relative percentage difference (RPO) are as
shown in Tables 11-1 and 11-2. If the \Rand/or RPD exceed the control
limits the results for the samples in the set are flagged to indicate
the potential for matrix interference.
Surrogate Spiking Compounds
All QC samples and environmental samples are fortified with surro-
gate spiking compounds. The percentage recovery of the surrogates is
used to evaluate the efficiency of recovery of the target analytes. The
surrogate compounds and control limits for recoveries are shown in
Tables 11-3 and 11-4.
If the recovery for any one volatile surrogate is outside the
control limit the calculations are checked. The surrogate spiking
solution and internal standards are checked for degradation. If these
steps do not resolve the problem, the sample is reanalyzed. If the
recoveries obtained for the reanalysis are within the control l.imi ts,
only the results of the rean_alysis are reported. If reanalysis fails to
resolve the problem the results for both analyses are reported.
If the _recovery of any one surrogate in the semivoiatiles extract
is< 10\ or the recovery of two surrogates in either the base neutral or
acid fraction is outside the recovery limits corrective action is taken.
The calculations are checked and the surrogate spiking and internal
standard solutions are checked for degradation. If this does n~t solve
the problem, the extract is reanalyzed. Should the recovery obtained
for the reanalysis of the extract not be within the acceptance criteria,
the sample is raextracted and reanalyzed. If acceptance criteria are
met at any point during this sequence, only the results of that analysis
are reported. If reanalysis of the sample does not provide recoveries
within the acceptance range, the results of the initial analysis are
11-2
155E/15 8/18/88
I
TABLE 11-1
VOLATILES MATRIX SPIKE RECOVERY LIMITS
Matrix Spike
Compound
1,1-Dichloroethene
Trichlorethene
Chlorobenzene
Toluene
Benzene
Relative
Percent Difference
Water Soil/Sediment
14
14
13
13
11
22
24
21
21
21
TABLE 11-2
Percentage Recovery
Water Soil/Sediment
61-145
71-120
75-130
76-125
76-127
59-172
62-137
60-133
59-139
66-142
SEMIVOLATILE MATRIX SPIKE RECOVERY LIMITS
Relative
Matrix Spike Percent Difference Percentage Recove::r
Compound Water Soil/Sediment Water Soil/Sediment
1,2,4,Trichlorobenzene 28 23 39-98 38-107
Acenaphthene 31 19 46-118 31-137
2,4-Dinitrotoluene 38 47 24-96 28-89
Pyrene 31 36 26-127 35-142
N-Nitroso-D1-n-Propylamine 38 38 41-116 41-126
1.4-Dichlorobenzene 28 27 36-97 28-104
Pentachlorophenol 50 47 9-103 17-109
Phenol 42 35 12-89 26-90
2-Chlorophenol 40 50 27-123 25-102
4-Chloro-3-Methylphenol 42 33 23-97 26-103
4-Nitrophenol 50 50 10-80 11-114
11-3
155E/15 8/18/88
I
TABLE 11-3
VOLATILE SURROGATE SPIKE RECOVERY LIMITS
Surrogate Compound
Toluene-d8
4-Bromofluorobenzene
1,2-Dichloroethane-d4
Water
88-110
86-115
76-114
TABLE 11-4
Low/Medium Soil
81-117
74-121
70-121
SEMIVOLATILE SURROGATE SPIKE RECOVERY LIMITS
Surrogate Compound Water Low/Medium Soil
Nitrobenzene-d5 35-114 23-120
2-Fluorobiphenyl 43-116 30-115
Phenol-d5 10-94 24-113
2-Fluorophen_ol 21-100 25-121
2,4,6-Tribromophenol 10-123 19-122
11-4
155E/15 8/18/88
I
reported with an explanation, or the results obtained for both samples
are available upon request.
GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
Blanks
Each set of samples analyzed for eemivolatile organic compounds is
prepared with a method blank. This is a sample of similar matrix which
is processed through all steps of the sample preparation in the same
manner as the samples • The concentration of target compounds in the
method blank must be < the quanti tat ion limit with the exception of
phthalate esters for which a concentration of five times the. quanti ta-
tion limit is the control limit.
Analyzes for volatile organic compounds include a blank analysis of
the laboratory reagent water. The blank is analyzed with each set of
samples or more often as required to avoid carryover bet.ween samples.
The concentration of target compounds in the blanks must be < the
quantitation limit with the exception of common laboratory solvents for
which a control limit of 5x the quantitiation limit is used.
Matrix Spiked Samples
Each set of samples is analyzed with a matrix spiked sample and a
matrix spike duplicate. The spiking compounds are as shown in Table
11-1 for volatiles. The matrix spike compounds used for other GC
analyses are selected upon the basis of the method used and the target
compounds re.quested. The control limits for \Rand RSD are determined
by the use of laboratory control charts.
Surrogate Spikes
Samples analyzed for volatile organics are spiked with the surro-
gate compounds bromochloropropane (halogenated volatiles) and a ,a ,a-
trifluorotoluene (volatile aromatics). Dibutylchlorendate is the
surrogate for organochlorine pesticides and PCBs. The commonly used
internal standards are used for the determination of surrogate recover-
ies for other GC methods. The \R for the surrogate compounds is com-
pared to analysis ·control charts to determine the acceptance limits.
11-5
155E/15 8/18/88
I
I l .
I
I
I
I t ' I
1-•
METALS ANALYSES
Blanks
A preparation blank is prepared and analyzed with each set of
samples. An analysis blank is analyzed immediately after the initial
calibration verification standard and after the continuing calibration
verification standard (each 10 samples or every 2 hours). If the
prepar~tion blank contains the analyte(s) of interest at a concentration
> Sx the quantitation limit the source of the problem is identified and
corrective action, which may include redigestion and analysis, is
implemented. If the analysis blank contains the analyte(s) of interest
above the method detection limit, the blank is reanalyzed. If this does
not correct the problem the analysis is stopped and the problem cor-
rected before proceeding.
Duplicates
A sample is randomly selected from each set of samples and prepared
in duplicate. The results of the duplicate analyses are used to assess
the precision of the data. A relative percentage difference of 20\ is
used as a control limit if the sample concentration is .!_ 5 times the
quantitation limit. A control limit of .:!:. the quantitation limit is
applicable for the precision of samples containing< Sx the quantitation
limit.
Spiked Samples
A sample is randomly selected for each set of samples of similar
matrix and spiked with the target analyte(s) prior to preparation. An
acceptance range of 75 to 125\ recovery is used. Samples analyzed by
ICP which contain metal(a) that exceed the acceptance range are reana-
lyzed with an analytical spike of the metal (s). The results of the
matrix spike and analytical spike analyses are used to qualify the data
obtained for all samples in the set by means of •flags".
All samples quantitated by graphite furnace atomic absorption are
analyzed with an analytical spike. The analytical spike result is used
to determine the effect of matrix interferenta and the potential need
for reanalysea of a ■ample by the method of standard additions (MSA) or
qualification of the data by the use of flags.
11-6
155E/15 11,uaa
I
'· l
I
• I
' • I
'
I
verification sample and after each 10 samples in the set. The analysis
blank must contain< the quantitation limit for each analyte.
Duplicate
A randomly selected sample from each set is prepared and analyzed
in duplicate. Laboratory control charts for relative percentage dif-
ference are maintained and used to establish control limits for pre-
cision.
Spiked Samples
A sample from each set is randomly selected and spiked with the
analyte(s) of interest. The percentage recovery of the spike is calcu-
lated. Analysis control charts for percentage recovery are maintained
and used to establish control limits.
Laboratory Control Samples
A laboratory control sample, if available, is analyzed for the
target analyte with each set of samples.
Physical Parameters
Physical parameters of aqueous samples are determined with the QC
sample analysis amenable to the method. Analysis blenks and sample
duplicates are analyzed with each set of samples.
11-8
155E/15 7/14/88
u
SECTION 12
CORRECTIVE ACTION
·Quality control samples are analyzed with each set of samples, with
a maximum of 20 samples of similar matrix per set. The results of the
QC analyses are used to determine the acceptability of the sample
analysis results. The criteria upon which these decisions are made are
incorporated in the individual methods as described in section 11.
The results of QC analyses are calculated by the analyst. If a
problem is encountered, the situation is brought to the attention of the
Laboratory Supervisor. If the problem is one for which the corrective
action is specified in the method, the appropriate action is taken
immediately. This may include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Checking the calculation for potential error;
Qualifying the results by "flagging" in a manner consistant
with the USEPA/CLP data qualifiers;
Analysis of an analytical spike sample;
Analysis of a blank sample;
Analysis of a laboratory control sample;
Analysis of a continuing calibration sample;
Reanalysis of a sample or sample set; or
Recalibration of the instrument •
Each of these potential actions is implemented in accordance with
the recommendations/requirements contained in or associated with the
analysis method. In the event the analyst does not identify the prob-
lem, the Laboratory Supervisor and QC Coordinator sequentially review
12-1
155E/12 7/13/88
I I
j
I I
I ' . '
I
the QC data to confirm its acceptability. Corrective action may be
implemented at any stage of this review process.
Should a problem arise, for which the corrective action is not
specified by the method, or there is a question regarding the interpre-
tation of the situation, the Technical Manager is consul·Lcd. Should the
resolution of the situation require actions beyond the normal laboratory
standard procedures, the Project Manager/Client is informed of the
situation, proposed resolution, and potential affect upon the quality of
the work product.
12-2
155E/12 7/13/88
I
I
SECTION 13
DATA EVALUATION
The analytical methods used by the ES laboratory are as recommended
by the USEPA. The criteria for acceptance of results are contained in
the methods for analyses for organics by GC/MS and some GC methods, and
metals by ICP and AAS furnace. The recommendations for qualification of
the results by flagging, confirmation of matrix interference, and other
deivations from the normal presentation of results are followed. The
laboratory uses in-house QC data in the form of analysis control charts
to establish the acceptance criteria for tests which do not have USEPA
recommended control limits for QC data.
The Laboratory Supervisor has the responsibility for review of the
QC and environmental sample analyses results to ensure the work product
is consistent with the standards of the discipline. Approval is indi-
cated by the signature of the Laboratory Supervisor on the analysis
report.
13-1
155E/13 7/13/88
I
~
I •
I
I •
APPENDIX A
REQUIRED CONTAINERS, PRESERVATION TECHNIQUES, AND HOLDING TIMES
I
I
APPENDIX A
REQUIRED CONTAINERS, PRESERVATION TECHNIQUES, AND HOLDING TIMES
Test
Organics
Purgeable Halocarbons
Purgeable Aromatic
Volatile Organic
Compounds by GC/MS
Semi volatiles
Inorganic Tests
Acidity
Alkalinity
Ammonia
Biochemical Oxygen
Demand
Bromide
( 1 ) Polyethylene ( p) •
1 SSE/18
( 1) Container
G, Teflon-lined
septum
G, Teflon-lined
septum
G, Teflon-lined
septum
G, Teflon-lined
septum
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
Glass ( G)
A-1
Preservation
Maximum
Holding
Time
Cool, 4°C, 0.008\
Na 2s2o3
14 days
Cool, 4°C, 0.008\
Na2s2o3 , HCl to pH2
14 days
HCl to pH2
Cool, 4°C
Cool, 4°C
Cool, 4°C
14 days
Soils:
14 days until
extraction and
analysis within
40 days of
extraction
Water:
7 days until
extraction and
analysis within
40 days of
extraction
Cool, 4°C, H2S04
to pH <2
14 days
14 days
28 days
Cool, 4°C
None required
48 hours
28 days
8/18/66
I
I
!
1·
a
-'.
I
REQUIRED CONTAINERS, PRESERVATION TECHNIQUES, AND HOLDING TIMES
(Continued)
Test
Biochemical Oxygen
Demand, Carbonaceous
Chemical oxygen
Demand
Chloride
Chlorine, Total
Residual
Color
Cyanide, Total and
Amenable to
Chlorination
Fluoride
Hardness
Hydrogen Ion (pH)
Kjeldahl and Organic
Nitrogen
Metals
Chromium VI
Mercury
Metals, lfxcept
Chromium VI and
Mercury
Nitrate
Nitrate-Nitrite
Nitrite
Oil and Grease
Organic Carbon
Orthophosphate
P,
P,
P,
P,
P,
P,
p
P,
P,
P,
P,
P,
P,
P,
P,
P,
G
P,
P,
( 1 l Container
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
< 1 l Polyethylene (Pl, Glass (G)
A-2
155E/18
Preservation
Cool, 4°C
Cool, 4°C, H2SO4
to pH <2
None required
None required
cool 4°C
Cool 4 ·c, Na OH
to pH > 12,
O.6g ascorbic acid
None required
HNo 3 to pH <2,
H2so4 to pH <2
None required
Cool, 4°C, H2SO4
to pH <2
cool 4•c
HNO 3 to pH <2
HNo 3 to pH <2
cool 4°C
Cool 4°C, H2SO4
to pH <2
cool 4°C
Cool, 4°C, H2SO4
to pH <2
Cool, 4°C, HCl or
H2so4 to pH <2
Filter immediately,
cool, 4•c
Maximum
Holding
Time
48 hours
28 days
28 days
Analyze
immediately
48 hours
14 days
28 days
6 months
Analyze
immediately
28 days
24 hours
28 days
6 months
48 hours
28 days
48 hours
28 days
28 days
48 hours
7/13/88
REQUIRED CONTAINERS, PRESERVATION TECHNIQUES, AND HOLDING TIMES
(Continued)
Maximum
( 1) Bolding
Test Container Preservation Time
Oxygen, Dissolved
Probe G bottle and top None required Analyze
immediately
Winkler Fix on site and 8 hours
store in dark
Phenols G only Cool, 4•c. H2so4 28 days
to pH <2
Phosphorus ( Elemental) G Cool, 4•c 48 hours
Phosphorus, Total P, G Cool, 4•c. B2so4 28 days
to pH <2
Residue, Total P, G Cool, 4°c 7 days
Residue, Filterable P, G Cool, 4°c 7 days
Residue, Nonfilterable
(TSS) P, G Cool, 4•c 7 days
Residue, Settleable P, G Cool, 4°c 48 hours
Residue, Volatile P, G Cool, 4•c 7 days
Silica p Cool, 4•c 28 days
Specific Conductance P, G Cool, 4°c 28 days
Sulfate P, G Cool, 4°C 28 days
Sulfide P, G Cool, 4•c, add zinc 7 days
acetate plus sodium
hydroxide to pH >9
Sulfite P, G None required Analyze
immediately
Surfactants P, G Cool, 4•c 48 hours
Temperature P, ·G None required Analyze
immediately
Turbidity P, G Cool, 4•c 48 hours
(l)Polyethylene ( p) • Glass (G)
A-3
1SSE/18 7/13/88
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MEM)RANDIJM
UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
REGION IV
345 COURTLAND STREET
ATLANTA, GEORGIA 30315!5
DATE: DEC 1 9 1SC8
SUBJECI': RI/FS Pr.oject Oper.ation Plan for. the .. Macon-Dxker.y CERCIA Site,
Cor.dova, Nor.th Car.olina
FROM: John s. Nohr.stedt
Remedial Pr.oject Manager.
TO: Char.lotte Var.lashkin
NCDHR
Attached is the RI/FS Pr.oject Oper.ations Plan (POP) for. the above r.efer.enced
site. This plan has been p,:epar.ed by the PRPs. One section that may be of
par.ticular. concer.n to you may be Section-s.o~-Satisfaction of Per.mitting
Requir.ements. Please r.eview the POP and provide me with any comments you may
have by Januar.y 13, 1989. If you have any questions please call me at
404/347-7791, ext. 33.
Attachments
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE 4.1
INHALATION EXPOSURE LIMITS (CONTINUED)
Contaminant TLV-'TWA
Toluene 100 ppm
Trichloroethylene 50 ppm
Vanadium 0.05 mg/m3
Zinc 5 mg/m3
A 1 • Confirmed Human Carcinogen
As • Suspected Human Carcinogen
TLV-STEL
150 ppm
200 ppm
N/A
10 mg/m3
154
PEL
200 ppm
3000 ppm Ceil
500 ppm-10 min
Peak
100 ppm
200 ppm Ceil
300 ppm Peak
0.1 mg/m3 Ceil
5 mg!m3
15 mg/m3/
15 min Ceil
IDLH
2000 ppm
70 mg/m3
70 mg!m3
N/A
I
I·
Manager and the Manager of ED. The Technical Director is responsible
for performing peer review of the work product.
Quality assurance for chemical analyses performed by ES laboratory
operations requires provisions which are unique to .the discipline.
H011ever, the management of quality assurance foll011s the corporate
structure. The Technical Manager for laboratory services reports
directly to the Manager of Engineering Direction, as a member of the ED
staff.· The Technical Manager serves as the Quality Assurance Manager
for the ES Laboratories. He is assisted in this function by a Quality
control Coordinator designated at each facility. The QC coordinator
reviews results of QC analyses, maintains laboratory QC records and
analysis control charts, and prepares QC summary reports for each
project.
The Technical Manager is informed of any problems requiring correc-
tive action other than routinely taken as described in this manual or
the analysis method. He recommends the appropriate corrective action to
be taken and oversees the implementation.
The Laboratory Manager acts in the role of the Technical Director
as described in the corporate QA structure. The Laboratory Manager is
responsible for review of the work product and ensuring the resources
required to produce·quality results in a timely manner are available.
The duties of the Project Manager are performed by a team consist-
ing of the Laboratory Supervisors and Project Coordinator. The Labora-
tory supervisors are responsible for the technical accuracy, complete-
ness, and documentation of the work product. They develop and monitor
the work schedules, ensure appropriat·e methods are correctly applied,
review analysis and QC data, and approve the final work product. The
Project coordinator is responsible for providing all necessary project
information to the Laboratory supervisors to ensure the work is per-
formed in the manner required for the project. The Project Coordinator
is responsible for sample logging, data handling, and preparation of the
analysis report.
2-2
155E/3 7/13/88
I
SECTION 3
PERSONNEL TRAINING
Quality control begins before the sample has reached the labora-
tory. The selection of well-qualified personnel, based upon education
and/or experience is the first step in successful laboratory management.
A thorough screening of job applicants and selection of the most quali-
fied candidate to fulfill well-defined tasks is an important aspect of
quality assurance.
The laboratory utilizes a formal program for indoctrination of new
employees. A defined sequence of events for familiarization and train-
ing is followed to ensure the employee is prepared to perform the
task(s) to which assigned. The training and certification procedures
used in the ES laboratory are:
•
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
155E/4
Familiarization with the laboratory standard operating pro-
cedures;
Study of the QA/QC manual;
Observation of analyses performed by experienced analysts;
Study of instrument operating __ manuals;
Instruction by the laboratory supervisor on all aspects of an
analysis;
Performance of the analysis under supervision of experienced
laboratory personnel;
Analyses of QC samples and QA samples; and
Participation in in-house seminars on laboratory methods and
procedures.
3-1
8/18/86
The. documentation of training for the analysts is maintained in the
Personnel Training Log. An example page of this log is shown in Figure
3. 1.
3-2
155E/4 8/18/88
Employee
FIGURE 3. 1
PERSONNEL TRAINING RECORD
Employee Number
Date of Employment
Laboratory Orientation:
Upon completion of each phase of personnel training, the employee and
Laboratory Supervisor will initial and date the step completed.
•
•
•
The laboratory Standard Operating Procedures have been read and under-
stood.
Employee Supervisor Date
The QA/QC manual has been read, and the procedures for the laboratory
have been explained.
Employee Supervisor Date
Operation manuals for instruments with which the employee performs
analyses have been studied, and the procedures for operation and main-
tenance are understood.
Instrument Employee Supervisor £!!.!!. Instrument Employee Supervisor Date
3-3
155E/17 7/13/83
.U
\ FIGURE 3.1 (continued)
Test Specific Training:
Each specific test performed in the laboratory involves procedures which
111ey be unique. The steps involved in training an employee are:
•
•
•
•
Instruction by the Laboratory Supervisor on all aspects of the
analysis;
Observation of the analysis performed by analysts;
Performance of analysis of QA samples; and
Participation in in-house seminars of the laboratory methods and
procedures.
The following table is to be completed by dating and initialing by the
employee and Laboratory Supervisor upon completion of each step.
Method Instruction Observation
3-4
155E/17
Performance
of Analysis
Analysis of
QA Samples Seminars
7/13/88
I
SECTION 4
SAMPLE HANDLING
The ES laboratory sample custodian or designated alternate receives
and assumes custody of samples until they have been properly logged into
the laboratory and stored in a secure area.
Upon receipt of a sample set, the shipping container is inspected
for warning labels and security seals before opening. Shipping contain-
ers are placed in a chemical fume hood prior to opening. The sample
custodian opens the container and carefully checks the contents for
evidence of breakage or leaking. The contents of the container are
inspected for chain-of-custody documents (Figure 4.1) and other informa-
tion or instructions. The sample custodian verifies that all information
on the sample bottle labels (Figure 4.2) is correct and correlates with
that on the chain-of-custody forms and signs for receipt. The pH of
aqueous samples is determined, with the exception of sample containers
to be analyzed for volatile organics. The chain-of-custody form is
retained in the job file and a copy is returned to the client or project
manager to verify receipt. Any discrepancy between the samples received
and the chain-of-custody information, broken or leaking sample bottles,
or other abnormal situation is reported to the project coordinator. The
client is informed of the problem and corrective action options are
discussed and implemented. Notations of the problem and resolution are
made on the chain-of-custody form, initialed and dated by the sample
custodian. Identifying information is recorded in a bound sample log
book.·
•
•
•
•
•
155E/5
The information required includes:
Date of Receipt
Client Name
Client Identifying Number of Description
Project Number
Analyses Required
4-1
8/18/88
CLIENT: PROJECT MANAGER: PROJ. NO,:
ENGINEERING-SCIENCE,
INC. BERKELEY
PROJECT NAME / LOCATION:
SAMPLER($): (SIGNATURE)
RELINQUISHED BY:ISIGNATUREl
RELINQUISHED BY,ISIGNATUREl
•
en a: w z
<( .... z 0 u
IL 0
d
SAMPLE LOCATION
z
DATE/TIME RECEIVED BY: ISIGNATUREl
DATE/TIME RECEIVED FOR LABORATORY BY:
ISIGNATUREI
~--·----------.·---. --PAGE OF
RELINQUISHED BY: ISIGNATUREI DATE/TIME RECEIVED BY: ISIGNATUREI
DATE/TIME REMARKS
' ;
I
ENGINEERING-SCIENCE, INC.
ES ENGINEERING-SCIENCE
l.eborllOl"y Service, Division
eoo Blnctoh Way. Berkeley. California 9'710
Telephone: •15(841-7353
CUent'e 1.0.: E.8. Lab Number:
Contal ner # of
Analyee for: Date:
Time:
Preservative: Sampled by: